%N

$)')4!,#!-%2!
4HE.IKON'UIDETO$IGITAL0HOTOGRAPHY
WITHTHE
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
The Table of Contents See pages v–vi
Find items by function or menu name.
The Q&A Index See pages vii–ix
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from the
“question and answer” index.
The Index See pages 123–125
Search by key word.
Error Messages See pages 111–112
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution here.
Troubleshooting See pages 108–110
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 3 for
details.
Digitutor
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following website:
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
i
Introduction
Tutorial Photography and Playback
Reference
More on Photography (All Modes)
P, S, A, and M Modes
More on Playback
Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV
Menu Guide
Playback Options: The Playback Menu
Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu
Custom Settings
Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu
Technical Notes
ii For Your Safety
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the follow-
ing safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety
instructions where all those who use the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this
section are indicated by the following symbol:
WARNINGS
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using this Nikon
product.
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light source through
the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impair-
ment.
Using the viewfinder diopter control
When operating the viewfinder diopter control with
your eye to the viewfinder, care should be taken not to
put your finger in your eye accidentally.
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming
from the equipment or AC adapter (available sepa-
rately), unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury. After removing the
battery, take the equipment to a Nikon-authorized ser-
vice center for inspection.
Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts could result in
injury. In the event of malfunction, the product should
be repaired only by a qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result of a fall or other acci-
dent, remove the battery and/or AC adapter and then
take the product to a Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas
Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of
flammable gas, as this could result in explosion or fire.
Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury.
Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant
or child could result in strangulation.
Observe proper precautions when handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled.
Observe the following precautions when handling bat-
teries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.
• Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery.
If you are using an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive
heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Replace the terminal cover when transporting the bat-
tery. Do not transport or store the battery with metal
objects such as necklaces or hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged.
To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use, attach the terminal
cover and store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot immediately after use or when
the product has been used on battery power for an
extended period. Before removing the battery turn the
camera off and allow the battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any
changes in the battery, such as discoloration or defor-
mation.
Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be
removed with a dry cloth. Continued use could result
in fire.
• Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger
during thunderstorms. Failure to observe this precau-
tion could result in electric shock.
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug or bend the
power cable. Do not place it under heavy objects or
expose it to heat or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become exposed, take the
power cable to a Nikon-authorized service representa-
tive for inspection. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in elec-
tric shock.
Notices iii
Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input and output jacks,
use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the pur-
pose to maintain compliance with product regulations.
CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or manuals should not
be played back on audio CD equipment. Playing CD-
ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss
or damage the equipment.
Observe caution when using the flash
Do not operate the flash with the flash window touch-
ing a person or object. Failure to observe this precau-
tion could result in burns or fire.
Using the flash close to the subject’s eyes could cause
temporary visual impairment. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants, when the flash
should be no less than one meter (39in.) from the sub-
ject.
Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal
from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language in any form, by any
means, without Nikon’s prior written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the
hardware and software described in these manuals at any
time and without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting
from the use of this product.
• While every effort has been made to ensure that the infor-
mation in these manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omis-
sions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your
area (address provided separately).
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
ate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which can be deter-
mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television tech-
nician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly
approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your
equipment. Using other interface cables may exceed the
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product may expose
you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to
cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la
norme NMB-003 du Canada.
D40x
iv Notices
Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries
This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
• This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digi-
tal camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local government bonds, even if
such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or
securities which are circulated in a foreign country is pro-
hibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been
obtained, the copying or reproduction or unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohib-
ited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the gov-
ernment and of certified documents stipulated by law is
prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or repro-
ductions of securities issued by private companies (shares,
bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary
copies are to be provided for business use by a company.
Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public agencies and pri-
vate groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal
coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative
works such as books, music, paintings, woodcuts, prints,
maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by
national and international copyright laws. Do not use this
product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to
infringe copyright laws.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the
original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially avail-
able software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the
user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial dele-
tion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for exam-
ple, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset white balance and for Info display
format>Wallpaper. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft corporation. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD Card Association. The SDHC logo is a
trademark. Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. PictBridge is a trademark.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Table of Contents v
For Your Safety........................................................................ii
Notices..................................................................................... iii
Q&A Index ............................................................................ vii
Introduction ......................................................1
Getting to Know the Camera ........................................... 2
First Steps ................................................................................ 8
Attaching a Lens................................................................................ 8
Charging and Inserting the Battery....................................... 9
Basic Setup..........................................................................................11
Inserting Memory Cards.............................................................12
Adjusting Viewfinder Focus......................................................14
Tutorial ............................................................15
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) ............. 15
Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs)......... 18
Basic Playback...................................................................... 20
Reference.........................................................21
More on Photography (All Modes) ........................22
The Shooting Information Display............................... 22
Focus....................................................................................... 23
Focus Mode........................................................................................23
AF-Area Mode...................................................................................24
Focus Area Selection.....................................................................25
Focus Lock...........................................................................................26
Manual Focus ....................................................................................28
Image Quality and Size..................................................... 29
Image Quality....................................................................................30
Image Size ...........................................................................................30
Shooting Mode ................................................................... 32
Self-Timer and Remote Control Modes.............................33
Using the Built-in Flash..................................................... 34
ISO Sensitivity...................................................................... 37
Two-Button Reset............................................................... 38
P, S, A, and M Modes...............................................39
Mode P (Programmed Auto) .......................................... 40
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) ...................................... 41
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) .................................. 42
Mode M (Manual) ............................................................... 43
Exposure................................................................................ 45
Metering...............................................................................................45
Autoexposure Lock........................................................................46
Exposure Compensation............................................................47
Flash Compensation.....................................................................48
White Balance...................................................................... 49
More on Playback ..................................................50
Viewing Photographs on the Camera......................... 50
Photo Information..........................................................................51
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ...........52
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom................................53
Protecting Photographs from Deletion............................54
Deleting Individual Photographs..........................................54
Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV .............55
Connecting to a Computer ............................................. 55
Before Connecting the Camera............................................. 55
Connecting the USB Cable....................................................... 55
Printing Photographs........................................................ 57
Printing Via Direct USB Connection.................................... 57
Viewing Photographs on TV........................................... 62
Menu Guide..................................................... 63
Using Camera Menus........................................................ 63
Playback Options: The Playback Menu....................... 65
Delete..................................................................................................... 65
Playback Folder ................................................................................ 66
Rotate Tall ............................................................................................ 66
Slide Show.......................................................................................... 67
Print Set (DPOF) ............................................................................... 67
Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu ..................... 68
Optimize Image (P, S, A, and M Modes) ............................ 68
Image Quality ................................................................................... 70
Image Size........................................................................................... 70
White Balance (P, S, A, and M Modes) ................................ 70
ISO Sensitivity.................................................................................... 73
Noise Reduction.............................................................................. 73
Custom Settings.................................................................. 74
R: Reset.................................................................................................. 74
1: Beep................................................................................................... 74
2: Focus Mode .................................................................................. 75
3: AF-Area Mode.............................................................................. 75
4: Shooting Mode........................................................................... 75
5: Metering (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)........................... 75
6: No Memory Card?..................................................................... 75
7: Image Review.............................................................................. 75
8: Flash Compensation (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)....... 76
9: AF-assist (All Modes Except and )......................... 76
10: ISO Auto (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) ......................... 76
11: /Fn Button.............................................................................. 77
12: AE-L/AF-L..................................................................................... 77
13: AE Lock.......................................................................................... 77
14: Built-in Flash (P, S, A, and M Modes Only) ................ 78
15: Auto off Timers......................................................................... 78
16: Self-Timer ..................................................................................... 79
17: Remote on Duration............................................................. 79
Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu ................... 80
CSM/Setup menu........................................................................... 80
Format Memory Card................................................................... 81
Info Display Format ....................................................................... 81
Auto Shooting Info........................................................................ 83
World Time......................................................................................... 83
LCD Brightness................................................................................. 83
Video Mode........................................................................................ 83
Language............................................................................................. 84
Image Comment ............................................................................ 84
USB .......................................................................................................... 84
Table of Contents
vi Table of Contents
Folders....................................................................................................85
File No. Sequence ...........................................................................86
Mirror Lock-Up..................................................................................86
Firmware Version.............................................................................86
Dust off Ref Photo...........................................................................87
Auto Image Rotation....................................................................88
Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu......... 89
D-Lighting...........................................................................................90
Red-Eye Correction........................................................................91
Trim..........................................................................................................91
Monochrome.....................................................................................92
Filter Effects.........................................................................................92
Small Picture.......................................................................................92
Image Overlay...................................................................................94
Technical Notes ............................................... 96
Optional Accessories......................................................... 96
Lenses .................................................................................................... 97
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ...................................... 99
Other Accessories........................................................................ 102
Accessories for the D40x......................................................... 103
Caring for the Camera.................................................... 104
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ............ 106
Troubleshooting.............................................................. 108
Camera Error Messages and Displays ............................. 111
Appendix............................................................................ 113
Specifications.................................................................... 119
Index ............................................................. 123
Q&A Index vii
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.
General Questions
Camera Setup
Question Key phrase Page #
How do I use the menus? Using the menus 63–64
How do I get more information on a menu? Help 3
What do these indicators mean? Monitor, viewfinder
5–6,
81–82
What does this warning mean? Error messages and displays 111–112
How many more shots can I take with this card? Number of exposures remaining 29, 116
How much charge does the battery have left? Battery level 15
What does “exposure” mean and how does it work? Exposure 39
What do I do with the viewfinder eyepiece cap? Self timer, remote control 7, 33
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use? Optional flash units 99
What lenses can I use? Lenses 97
What accessories are available for my camera? Accessories for the D40x 96
What memory cards can I use? Approved memory cards 102
What software is available for my camera? Accessories for the D40x 103
Who can I ask to repair or inspect my camera? Servicing the camera x
How do I clean the camera or lens? Cleaning the camera 104
Question Key phrase Page #
How do I focus the viewfinder? Viewfinder focus 14
How do I keep the monitor from turning off?
Stand-by mode 78 How do I keep the shutter speed and aperture displays
from turning off?
How do I set the clock?
World time 11, 83 How do I set the clock for daylight savings time?
How do I change time zones when I travel?
How do I adjust monitor brightness? LCD brightness 83
How do I restore default settings? Two-button reset 38
How do I turn off the light on the front of the camera? AF-assist illuminator 76
How do I change the self timer delay? Self timer 33
How do I change the remote delay? Remote control 33
How do I keep the camera from beeping? Beep 74
How do I view all the items in the menus? CSM/setup menu 80
Can I display the menus in a different language? Language 84
How do I keep the file number from being reset when I
insert a new memory card?
File number sequence 86
How can I prevent the same file name from being
assigned to different photographs?
viii Q&A Index
Taking Photographs
Question Key phrase Page #
Is there an easy way to take snapshots? Auto mode 15
Is there an easy way to take more creative shots? Digital Vari-Program modes
18
What do I do if flash photography is prohibited? Auto (flash off ) mode
How do I bring out a portrait subject? Portrait mode
How can I get good landscape shots? Landscape mode
How do I take snapshots of my kids? Child mode
19
How do I “freeze” a moving subject? Sports mode
How do I take close ups of small objects? Close-up mode
Can I include night backgrounds in my portraits? Night portrait mode
How do I change camera settings using the shooting
information display?
Shooting information display 22
How do I take a lot of photographs quickly?
Shooting mode
32
Can I shoot a self-portrait? 33
Is there a remote control for this camera? 33
How do I adjust exposure? Exposure; P, S, A, and M modes 39
How do I freeze or blur moving objects? Mode S (shutter-priority auto) 41
How do I blur background details? Mode A (aperture-priority auto) 42
Can I make photos brighter or darker? Exposure compensation 47
How do I make a time exposure? Long time-exposures 44
How do I use the flash?
Flash photography, flash mode 34 Can the flash fire automatically when needed?
How do I keep the flash from firing?
How do I prevent red eye? Red-eye reduction 35
Can I take pictures under low light without the flash? ISO sensitivity 37
Can I control how the camera focuses? Autofocus 23
How do I focus on a moving subject? Focus mode 23
How do I choose where the camera focuses? Focus area 25
Can I change the composition after focusing? Focus lock 26
How do I improve image quality?
Image quality and size 29–30
How do I take bigger photographs?
How can I get more photos on the memory card?
Can I take photos at a reduced size for e-mail?
Q&A Index ix
Viewing, Printing, and Retouching Photographs
Question Key phrase Page #
Can I view my photographs on the camera? Camera playback 50
Can I view more information about photos? Photo info 51
Why parts of my photos blink? Photo info, highlights 52
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo? Deleting individual photos 54
Can I delete several photos at once? Delete 65
Can I zoom in on pictures to make sure they’re in focus? Playback zoom 53
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion? Protect 54
Is there an automatic playback (“slide show”) option? Slide show 67
Can I view my photos on TV? Television playback 62
How do I copy photos to my computer? Connecting to a computer 55
How do I print photographs? Printing photographs 57
Can I print photos without a computer? Printing via USB 57
Can I print the date on my photographs? Time stamp, DPOF 59, 61
How do I order professional prints? Print set 61
How do I bring out details in shadows? D-lighting 90
Can I get rid of red eye? Red-eye correction 91
Can I crop photographs on the camera? Trim 91
Can I create a monochrome copy of a photograph? Monochrome 92
Can I create a copy with different colors? Filter effects 92
Can I make a small copy of a photograph? Small picture 92
Can I overlay two photos to make a single image? Image overlay 94
x
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education, con-
tinually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-
asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional informa-
tion may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact
information: http://nikonimaging.com/
Introduction 1
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D40x single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera with
interchangeable lenses. This manual has been written to help you enjoy taking pictures
with your Nikon digital camera. Read this manual thoroughly before use, and keep it handy
when using the product.
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions
are used:
Lens
Autofocus is supported with AF-S and AF-I lenses only. An 18–55 mm f/3.5–5.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom
Nikkor lens ( 122) is used in this manual for illustrative purposes.
1. Focal length scale 2. Focal length scale index 3. Mounting index: 8
4. Rear cover: 8 5. CPU contacts: 45 6. A-M mode switch: 8, 28
7. Zoom ring 8. Focus ring: 28 9. Lens cap
This icon marks cautions, information that
should be read before use to prevent dam-
age to the camera.
This icon marks tips, additional information
that may be helpful when using the camera.
This icon marks notes, information that
should be read before using the camera.
This icon indicates that more information is
available elsewhere in this manual or in the
Quick Start Guide.
This icon marks settings that can be adjusted
using camera menus.
This icon marks settings that can be fine-
tuned from the Custom Settings menu.
ᕡᕡᕡ
··· »»»
¿¿¿ ´´´ ²²² ¶¶¶ ººº ¾¾¾
2 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You may find
it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Camera Body
1 Infrared receiver.............................................................. 33 10 Accessory shoe cover................................................. 99
2 Power switch.......................................................................4 11 Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit).......... 99
3 Shutter-release button............................................... 17 12 (flash mode) button............................................. 34
4 (exposure compensation) button................ 47 (flash compensation) button ...................... 48
(aperture) button.................................................... 43 13 Eyelet for camera strap................................................. 7
Flash compensation..................................................... 48 14 Connector cover.............................................55, 58, 62
5 (shooting information) button ...................... 22 15 Video connector ............................................................ 62
z (reset) button.............................................................. 38 16 Reset switch ...................................................................108
6 AF-assist illuminator..................................................... 23 17 USB connector.........................................................55, 58
Self-timer lamp................................................................ 33 18 (self-timer) button................................................. 33
Red-eye reduction lamp........................................... 35 (function) button.................................................. 77
7 (focal plane mark)................................................... 28 19 Lens release button........................................................ 8
8 Mode dial...............................................................................4 20 Lens mounting index .................................................... 8
9 Built-in flash....................................................................... 34
ᕢᕢᕢ
ᕣᕣᕣ
ᕤᕤᕤ
ᕥᕥᕥ
ᕦᕦᕦ
ººº
ᕧᕧᕧ
¾¾¾
¹¹¹
ƸƸƸ
ƹƹƹ
ƽƽƽ
ƾƾƾ
ƿƿƿ
ᕡᕡᕡ
ƺƺƺ
ƼƼƼ
ƻƻƻ
µµµ
¸¸¸
Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 3
* Multi selector
The multi selector is used for menu navigation and playback.
Help
For help on the current mode or menu item, press the button. Help is
displayed in the monitor while the button is pressed; to scroll the dis-
play, press the multi selector up or down. A blinking icon indicates
that help on an error or other problem can be viewed in the monitor by
pressing the button.
6 Eyelet for camera strap................................................. 7
7 Multi selector
*
8 Memory card slot cover ............................................ 12
9 (delete) button..................................................20, 54
10 Memory card access lamp...................................... 12
11 Power connector cover for optional AC
adapter connector .....................................................103
12 Battery-chamber cover latch................................. 10
13 Battery-chamber cover ...................................10, 103
14 Tripod socket
15 Monitor....................................................................6, 50, 82
16 (playback zoom) button..................................... 53
(setting) button ..................................................... 22
1 DK-16 viewfinder eyepiece cup...............................7 z (reset) button............................................................. 38
2 Viewfinder eyepiece ............................................... 5, 14 17 (thumbnail) button................................................ 52
3 Diopter adjustment control .................................... 14 (help) button
4 (AE-L/AF-L) button........................................... 46, 77 18 (menu) button.......................................................... 63
(protect) button....................................................... 54 19 (playback) button............................................20, 50
5 Command dial.............................................................. 115
View more photo info Playback ( 51)
Move cursor up Menus/shooting info ( 22, 63)
Press up
View previous photo Press right
Return to previous menu View next photo
Cancel Press left Display sub-menu
Press down
Retouch photo ( 89)
View more photo info Make selection
Move cursor down
ᕢᕢᕢ
ᕡᕡᕡ
ƽƽƽ
ƾƾƾ
ƼƼƼ
ƻƻƻ
ƺƺƺ
ƹƹƹ
ƸƸƸ
¹¹¹
¸¸¸
µµµ
ᕩᕩᕩ
ᕨᕨᕨ
ᕧᕧᕧ
ᕦᕦᕦ
ᕥᕥᕥ ᕤᕤᕤ
ᕣᕣᕣ
4 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera
The Mode Dial
The D40x offers a choice of the following twelve shooting modes:
The Power Switch
The power switch is used to turn the camera on and off.
On Off
Advanced Modes (Exposure Modes)
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.
P—Programmed auto: 40
S—Shutter-priority auto: 41
A—Aperture-priority auto: 42
M—Manual: 43
Point-and-Shoot Modes (Digital Vari-Programs)
Selecting a Digital Vari-Program automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene,
making creative photography as simple as rotating the mode dial.
—Auto: 15
—Auto (flash off): 18
—Portrait: 18
—Landscape: 18
—Child: 19
—Sports: 19
—Close up: 19
—Night portrait: 19
Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 5
The Viewfinder Display
1 Focus brackets (focus areas) ....14, 16, 24, 25, 26 10 Number of exposures remaining.............. 15, 116
2 Focus indicator ....................................................... 16, 26 Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills............................................. 32, 116 3 Focus area display..........................14, 16, 24, 25, 26
AF-area mode.................................................................. 24 Preset white balance recording indicator ...... 71
4 Autoexposure (AE) lock............................................. 46 Exposure compensation value.............................. 47
5 Flexible program indicator ...................................... 40 Flash compensation value....................................... 48
6 Shutter speed..........................................................39–44 PC connection indicator ........................................... 56
Dust off ref photo mode indicator...................... 87
7 Aperture (f/-number)..........................................39–44 11 Flash-ready indicator ................................................... 17
8 Flash compensation indicator.............48, 78, 101 12 Battery indicator............................................................. 15
9 Exposure compensation indicator ..................... 47 13 Electronic analog exposure display.................... 43
Exposure compensation........................................... 47
14 ISO AUTO indicator............................................... 37, 76
15 “K” (appears when memory remains for
over 1000 exposures)
16 Warning indicator.................................................. 3, 111
The Viewfinder
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder may vary with temperature. This is normal and
does not indicate a malfunction.
Large-Capacity Memory Cards
When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thou-
sand or more pictures at current settings, the number of exposures
remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down to the nearest
hundred (e.g., if there is room for approximately 1,160 exposures, the
exposure count display will show 1.1K).
1
2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
6 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera
The Shooting Information Display
To view camera settings, press the button. The following shooting information will be
displayed in the monitor. See page 22 for information on changing camera settings.
Note: Above display is shown when Graphic is selected for Info display format. See page 81 for
other display formats.
The Shutter-Speed and Aperture Displays
These displays provide a visual indication of shutter speed and aperture.
1 Focus area display......................... 14, 16, 24, 25, 26 13 Metering mode.............................................................. 45
AF-area mode .................................................................. 24 14 AF-area mode.................................................................. 24
2 Shutter speed.......................................................... 39–44 15 Focus mode...................................................................... 23
3 Electronic analog exposure display ................... 43 16 Shooting mode.............................................................. 32
Exposure compensation........................................... 47 17 ISO sensitivity................................................................... 37
4 Aperture (f/-number) ......................................... 39–44 18 White balance mode.................................................. 49
5 Mode........................................................................................4 19 Image size.......................................................................... 30
6 Shutter-speed display 20 Image quality................................................................... 30
7 Aperture display 21 Battery indicator ............................................................ 15
8 Flash compensation value....................................... 48 22 “Beep” indicator.............................................................. 74
9 Flash sync mode............................................................. 35 23 Optimize image indicator........................................ 68
10 Exposure compensation value.............................. 47 24 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator..........................37, 76
11 Help indicator .....................................................................3 25 Manual flash control indicator.............................. 78
12 Number of exposures remaining.............. 15, 116 Flash compensation indicator for
optional Speedlight...................................................101 Preset white balance recording indicator ...... 71
PC mode indicator........................................................ 56
Fast shutter speed, large aperture
(small f/-number)
Slow shutter speed, small aperture
(large f/-number)
17
16
15
14
13
12
1
3
6
7
8
5
18
19
20
22 21 23 24 25
2
4
9
11
10
Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 7
Supplied Accessories
The DK-5 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cap
Attach the DK-5 viewfinder eyepiece cap for self-timer ( 33) or
remote control photography ( 33). Before attaching the DK-5 or
other viewfinder accessories ( 102), remove the DK-16 viewfinder
eyepiece cup. Hold the camera firmly when removing the cup.
The Camera Strap
Attach the camera strap as shown below.
The MH-23 Quick Charger ( 122)
The MH-23 is for use with the supplied EN-EL9 battery.
The EN-EL9 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery ( 103, 121)
The EN-EL9 is for use with the D40x.
CHARGE lamp AC adapter plug
AC inlet Wall plug (shape varies with country of sale)
The use of third-party rechargeable
Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown above
could interfere with normal opera-
tion of the camera or result in the
batteries overheating, igniting, rup-
turing, or leaking.
Negative terminal
Signal contact
Terminal cover
Positive terminal
8 Introduction: First Steps
First Steps
Attaching a Lens
Autofocus is supported with AF-S and AF-I lenses only. Care should be taken to prevent
dust from entering the camera when exchanging lenses.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the body cap.
Remove the rear lens cap from the lens.
2
Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the
mounting index on the camera body, position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount and rotate the lens in the direction
shown until it clicks into place.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch, select A
(autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with manual priority).
Detaching Lenses
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To
remove the lens, press and hold the lens-release button while turning the
lens clockwise. After removing the lens, replace the camera body cap and
rear lens cover.
Aperture Ring
If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring, lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f/-num-
ber). See the lens manual for details.
Introduction: First Steps 9
Charging and Inserting the Battery
The supplied EN-EL9 battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery using the sup-
plied MH-23 battery charger as described below.
1
Charge the battery.
The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages ii–iii and 106–107 of this manual, together with any
warnings and instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F). During
charging, the temperature should be in the vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F). For best results, charge the
battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may drop if the battery is charged or used
at lower temperatures.
1.1 Remove the terminal cover from the battery.
1.2 Connect the power cord to the charger and plug it in.
1.3 Place the battery in the charger. The CHARGE lamp will blink
as the battery charges. About 90 minutes are required for
an exhausted battery to fully charge.
1.4 Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blink-
ing. Remove the battery from the charger and unplug the
charger.
10 Introduction: First Steps
2
Insert the battery.
2.1 After confirming that the power switch is in the off posi-
tion, open the battery chamber cover.
2.2 Insert a fully charged battery as shown at right. Close the
battery chamber cover.
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off before removing the battery. To avoid shorting the battery, replace the terminal
cover when the battery is not in use.
Introduction: First Steps 11
Basic Setup
The first time the camera is turned on, the language selection dialog shown in Step 1 will be
displayed in the monitor. Follow the steps below to choose a language and set the time
and date. No photographs can be taken until the camera clock has been set.
Using Camera Menus
The language menu is only displayed automatically the first time the camera is turned on. See the
Menu Guide ( 63) for information on normal menu operation.
Turn camera on. Select language.
Display map of world time zones. * Select local time zone.
* UTC field shows time difference between selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC), in hours.
Display daylight saving time options. Highlight On if daylight saving time is in effect.
Display date menu. Press multi selector left or right to select item,
up or down to change.
To reset the camera clock, choose a new time
zone, turn daylight saving time on or off, or
choose the order in which the year, month, and
date are displayed, use the World time option in
the setup menu ( 83).
Exit to shooting mode.
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9
12 Introduction: First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately). See
“Approved Memory Cards” for information on approved memory cards ( 102).
1
Insert a memory card.
Removing Memory Cards
1. Confirm that the access lamp is off.
2. Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover.
3. Press the card in to eject (c). The card can then be removed by hand
(d).
1.1 Before inserting or removing memory cards, turn the cam-
era off and open the card slot cover.
1.2 Slide the memory card in as shown at right until it clicks
into place. The memory card access lamp will light for
about a second. Close the memory card slot cover.
Front
Introduction: First Steps 13
2
Memory cards must be formatted in the camera before first use. Note that formatting
memory cards permanently deletes all photographs and other data they may contain.
Be sure all data you wish to keep have been copied to another storage device before for-
matting the card.
Turn camera on. Display menus. *
* If menu item is highlighted, press multi selector left to highlight icon for current menu.
Highlight . Position cursor in setup menu.
Highlight Format memory card. Display options.
Highlight Yes. Format card. Do not turn camera off or
remove card or battery until formatting is
complete and setup menu is displayed.
Formatting Memory Cards
Use the camera Format memory card option to format memory cards. Performance may drop if
cards are formatted in a computer.
The Write Protect Switch
SD cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental
loss of data. When this switch is in the “lock” position, the camera will dis-
play a message to warn that photos can not be recorded or deleted and
the memory card can not be formatted.
Write-protect switch
2.1 2.2
2.3 2.4
2.5 2.6
2.7 2.8
14 Introduction: First Steps
Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
Photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Before shooting, make
sure that the display in the viewfinder is in clear focus. The view-
finder can be focused by removing the lens cap and sliding the
diopter adjustment control up and down until the focus brackets
are in sharp focus. When operating the diopter adjustment con-
trol with your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fin-
gers or fingernails in your eye.
Auto Meter Off
At default settings, the viewfinder and shooting information display will turn off if no operations are
performed for about eight seconds (auto meter off ), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shut-
ter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder ( 17).
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom
Setting 15 (Auto off timers; 78).
8s
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on
Focus brackets
Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) 15
Tutorial
Photography and Playback
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode)
This section describes how to take photographs in (auto) mode, an automatic “point-
and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response
to shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Rotate the mode dial to (auto mode).
1.1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on. The moni-
tor will turn on and the viewfinder display will light.
1.2 If the monitor is off, press the button to display shooting
information. Check the battery level as described below.
Monitor Viewfinder Description
— Battery fully charged.
— Battery partially discharged.
Low battery. Prepare to charge battery.
(blinks)
(blinks)
Shutter release disabled. Charge battery.
If shooting information is not displayed when the button is pressed, the battery
is exhausted. Charge the battery.
1.3 The number of photographs that can be stored on the
memory card is shown in the shooting information display
and viewfinder. Check the number of exposures remain-
ing.
If there is not enough memory to store additional photo-
graphs at current settings, the display will flash as shown
at right. No further pictures can be taken until the mem-
ory card has been replaced or photographs have been
deleted ( 20, 65).
16 Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode)
3
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder.
4
Focus and shoot.
3.1 Hold the camera as shown.
Holding the Camera
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left. Keep your elbows propped lightly
against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace
ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable.
3.2 Frame a photo in the viewfinder with the main subject
positioned in any of the three focus areas.
Focus area
Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger
area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible in the
final photograph (select longer focal lengths to zoom in, shorter
focal lengths to zoom out).
Zoom in
Zoom out
4.1 Press the shutter-release button halfway. The camera will
automatically select the focus area containing the subject
closest to the camera and focus on this subject. If the sub-
ject is dark, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the
focus operation and the flash may pop up. The monitor
will turn off.
When the focus operation is complete, the selected focus
area will be highlighted, a beep will sound, and the in-
focus indicator (z) will appear in the viewfinder. The num-
ber of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer
(“r”; 32) is shown in the viewfinder display while the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) 17
5
Turn the camera off when shooting is complete.
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses and the monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the subject is stationary (or if single-servo auto-
focus is selected in P, S, A, or M mode; 23), a beep will sound and focus will lock. To take the photo-
graph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus Take photograph
The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in mode, the
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway (to prevent the flash from firing when lighting is poor,
select Auto (flash off ) mode). Flash range varies with aperture and ISO
sensitivity ( 117); remove lens hoods when using the flash. If the flash is
required, photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator
( ) is displayed. If a photograph can not be taken and the flash-ready
indicator is not displayed, remove your finger briefly from the shutter-
release button and try again.
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its closed
position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place. For
more information on using the flash, see page 34.
4.2 Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to release the shutter and record the photo-
graph. The access lamp next to the memory card slot
cover will light. Do not eject the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and
recording is complete.
18 Tutorial: Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs)
Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs)
In addition to , the D40x offers a choice of seven Digital Vari-Program modes. Selecting a
program automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative pho-
tography as easy as rotating the mode dial.
To take photographs in Digital Vari-Program modes:
Digital Vari-Program modes are described below.
Mode Description
Auto (flash off) For pictures that do not use the flash.
Portrait For portraits.
Landscape For natural and man-made landscapes.
Child For pictures of children.
Sports For moving subjects.
Close up For close up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects.
Night portrait For portraits taken under low light.
1
Rotate the mode dial to select a Digital Vari-Program mode.
2
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder, focus, and shoot.
Auto (Flash Off)
The built-in flash turns off. Use where flash photography is prohib-
ited, to photograph infants without using the flash, or to capture
natural lighting under low light. The camera selects the focus area
containing the closest subject; the AF-assist illuminator will light
to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.
Portrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking skin tones. The camera
selects the focus area containing the closest subject. If the subject
is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used, background
details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth.
Landscape
Use for vivid landscape shots. The camera selects the focus area
containing the closest subject; the built-in flash and AF-assist illu-
minator turn off automatically.
Tutorial: Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs) 19
The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in , , , or mode, the built-in flash will
pop automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. See “Using the Built-in Flash”
for information on choosing a flash mode ( 34).
Child
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing and background details
are vividly rendered while skin tones are given a soft, natural finish.
The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject.
Sports
High shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in
which the main subject stands out clearly. The camera focuses
continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
tracking the subject in the center focus area. If the subject leaves
the center focus area, the camera will continue to focus based on
information from the other focus areas. The starting focus area can be selected with the
multi selector. The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically.
Close Up
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects.
The camera automatically focuses on the subject in the center
focus area; other focus areas can be selected using the multi selec-
tor. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur.
Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the back-
ground in portraits taken under low light. The camera selects the
focus area containing the closest subject. Use of a tripod is recom-
mended to prevent blur.
20 Tutorial: Basic Playback
Basic Playback
Photographs are automatically displayed after shooting. The bat-
tery level and number of exposures remaining are also displayed.
If no photograph is displayed in the monitor, the most recent pic-
ture can be viewed by pressing the button ( 50).
Additional pictures can be displayed by rotating the command
dial or pressing the multi selector left or right.
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press
the button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press the
button again to delete the image and return to playback. To
exit without deleting the picture, press the button.
Reference 21
Reference
This section builds on the Tutorial to cover more advanced shooting and playback options.
More on Photography (All Modes): 22
P, S, A, and M Modes: 39
See the Menu Guide for information on other operations that can only be performed in P, S, A, and M
modes, including customizing sharpening, contrast, color saturation, and hue (“Optimize Image”;
68, 69).
More on Playback: 50
See the Menu Guide for other playback options ( 65–67).
Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV: 55
Use the shooting information display The Shooting Information Display: 22
Shoot a moving subject or focus manually Focus: 23
Adjust image quality and size Image Quality and Size: 29
Take photographs in one at a time, in bursts, or
using the self-timer or a remote control
Shooting Mode: 32
Use the built-in flash Using the Built-in Flash: 34
Raise ISO sensitivity when lighting is poor ISO Sensitivity: 37
Restore default settings Two-Button Reset: 38
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aper-
ture
Mode P (Programmed Auto): 40
Freeze or blur motion Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto): 41
Choose whether to blur background objects Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto): 42
Choose shutter speed and aperture manually Mode M (Manual): 43
Choose how the camera meters exposure, lock
exposure, adjust exposure and flash level
Exposure: 45
Make colors look natural
Take photos under unusual lighting
White Balance: 49
View photographs on the camera Viewing Photographs on the Camera: 50
Copy photographs to a computer Connecting to a Computer: 55
Print photographs Printing Photographs: 57
View photographs on TV Viewing Photographs on TV: 62
22 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/The Shooting Information Display
More on Photography (All Modes)
The Shooting Information Display
Pressing the button displays shooting information in the moni-
tor. Shooting information can also be displayed by pressing in
shooting mode, by pressing in P, S, or A mode, by pressing /
(unless white balance is selected for Custom Setting 11 in Digital
Vari-Program mode; 77), or by pressing when the flash is
enabled. Shooting information is also displayed after the shutter-
release button is released when On is selected for Auto shooting
info ( 83) and immediately after the camera is turned on. To
hide shooting information, press the button again. The display
format depends on the option selected for Info display format
in the setup menu ( 81).
The button can be used to change the settings shown in the
shooting information display.
Display shooting information. Selected setting is highlighted.
Highlight desired setting. Settings not available
in current mode are grayed out and can not be
selected.
Display options for highlighted setting. Highlight desired option.
*
* Press to return to Step 3 without modifying setting.
Select option. Repeat Steps 3–6 to change
other settings, or press to return to Step 1.
Take pictures. Monitor turns off while shutter-
release button is pressed.
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 23
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically (see “Focus Mode,” below) or manually ( 28). The
user can also select the focus area for automatic or manual focus ( 24, 25) or use focus lock
to focus to recompose photographs after focusing ( 26).
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses. AF-S and AF-C are available only in P, S, A, and M modes.
Controls used
The AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light automatically
to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not light in continuous-
servo AF or manual focus mode, in , or modes, or if the center focus
area is not selected or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting 9 (AF
assist). The illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0m (1ft. 8in.–9ft.
10in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–
200mm and remove the lens hood.
2—Focus Mode ( 75)
Focus mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu.
Focus mode Description
AF-A
Auto-servo AF
(default setting)
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus when subject is judged
to be stationary, continuous-servo autofocus when subject is judged to be
moving.
AF-S Single-servo AF
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
AF-C
Continuous-
servo AF
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release but-
ton is pressed halfway. Priority is given to shutter response, meaning that
shutter may sometimes be released before in-focus indicator (z) is displayed
in viewfinder.
MF Manual focus User focuses manually ( 28).
24 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus area is selected in autofocus mode. This setting has no effect in
manual focus mode.
Viewfinder Display
AF-area mode is shown in the viewfinder as follows:
3—AF-Area Mode ( 75)
AF-area mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu.
Controls used
Option Description
Closest
subject
Camera automatically selects focus area containing subject closest to camera. Default
for P, S, A, and M modes; selected automatically when mode dial is rotated to , , ,
, , or .
Dynamic
area
User selects focus area manually, but if subject leaves selected focus area even briefly,
camera will focus based on information from other focus areas. Use with erratically mov-
ing subjects. Selected automatically when mode dial is rotated to .
Single
area
User selects focus area using multi selector; camera focuses on subject in selected focus
area only. Use with stationary subjects. Selected automatically when mode dial is
rotated to .
Closest subject Dynamic area Single area
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 25
The D40x offers a choice of three focus areas. At default settings, the camera chooses the
focus area automatically or focuses on subject in the center focus area, but the focus area
can also be selected manually to compose photographs with the main subject positioned
at either side of the frame.
Focus Area Selection Controls used Multi selector
1
At default settings, the focus area is selected automatically in
, , , , , , P, S, A, and M modes. To enable manual
focus selection in these modes, select Single area or
Dynamic area for AF-area mode in the shooting information
display ( 24).
2
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the focus area
in the viewfinder or shooting information display. The
selected focus area is highlighted again when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
26 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible to
focus on a subject that will not be in a focus area in the final composition. It can also be
used when the autofocus system is unable to focus ( 27). Single or dynamic area AF is rec-
ommended when using focus lock ( 24).
The shutter-release button can not be used to lock focus in mode ( 19), continuous
shooting mode ( 32), or continuous-servo autofocus ( 23), or when continuous-servo
autofocus is selected in auto-servo AF ( 23). Use the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus. At
other settings, focus will remain locked between shots if the shutter-release button is kept
pressed halfway.
Focus Lock Controls used Shutter-release button/AE-L/AF-L button
1
Focus lock can be used with any focus area. Position the sub-
ject in the selected focus area ( 25) and press the shutter-
release button halfway to initiate focus.
2
Check that the in-focus indicator (z) appears in the view-
finder. Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indica-
tor appears, and remain locked while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. Focus can also be locked by press-
ing the AE-L/AF-L button while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. Focus will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L
button is pressed, even if you later remove your finger from
the shutter-release button.
3
Recompose the photograph and shoot.
12—AE-L/AF-L ( 77)
This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button.
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 27
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may be dis-
abled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (z) may be dis-
played and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject
is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus ( 28) or use focus lock ( 26) to focus on another
subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast
between the subject and the
background (e.g., the subject is
the same color as the back-
ground).
The focus area contains
objects at different distances
from the camera (e.g., the sub-
ject is inside a cage).
The subject is dominated by
regular geometric patterns
(e.g., a row of windows in a
skyscraper).
The focus area contains areas
of sharply contrasting bright-
ness (e.g., the subject is half in
the shade).
The subject appears smaller
than the focus area (e.g., focus
area contains both fore-
ground subject and distant
buildings).
The subject contains many
fine details (e.g., a field of flow-
ers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in
brightness).
28 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus
Manual Focus
Use this option when the camera is unable to focus correctly
using autofocus. To focus manually, select manual focus mode
and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the
clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be
taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus.
When using a lens that offers A-M selection, select M when focusing manually. With lenses
that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be adjusted manually with the
lens set to M or M/A. See the documentation provided with your lens for details.
Controls used
The Electronic Range Finder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus
indicator can be used to confirm whether the portion of the subject in
the selected focus area is in focus. After positioning the subject in the
active focus area, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the
lens focusing ring until the in-focus indicator (z) is displayed. Note that if
the subject is one for which autofocus does not perform well ( 27), the
in-focus indicator may be displayed when the subject is not in focus. Confirm that the image in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.
Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your subject and the camera, mea-
sure from the focal plane mark on the camera body. The distance
between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5mm
(1.83in.).
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size 29
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on
the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also
require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card.
Changes to image quality and size are reflected in the number of
exposures remaining as shown in the shooting information dis-
play and viewfinder ( 5, 6). The approximate maximum file size
of individual photographs and the total number of pictures that
can be recorded at the selected setting are also shown in the
shooting information display while image quality or size options are displayed ( 30).
Actual file size and memory card capacity may differ. Typical file sizes are listed on page 116.
Image Quality and Size Large file size
H
i
g
h
<
I
m
a
g
e

q
u
a
l
i
t
y
>
L
o
w
JPEG Fine
JPEG Normal
JPEG Basic
Small file size Small Medium Large
Small <Image size>Large
30 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size
Image Quality
The camera supports the following image quality options (the first four are listed in
descending order by image quality and file size):
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. The following options are available:
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.
When viewed on a computer, NEF images are 3,872×2,592 pixels in size.
Controls used
Option Format Description
RAW NEF
Compressed raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to memory card.
Choose for images that will be retouched on a computer.
FINE
JPEG
Images are compressed less than NORM, producing higher-quality images. Com-
pression ratio: roughly 1: 4.
NORM
(default)
Best choice in most situations. Compression ratio: roughly 1: 8.
BASIC Smaller file size suited to e-mail or the Web. Compression ratio: roughly 1: 16.
RAW+B NEF+JPEG
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG
image.
Controls used
Image size Size (pixels) Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi
L (default) 3,872×2,592 49.2×32.9cm (19.4×13.0in.)
M 2,896×1,944 36.8×24.7cm (14.5×9.7in.)
S 1,936×1,296 24.6×16.5cm (9.7×6.5in.)
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size 31
NEF (RAW)/RAW+B
NEF (RAW) files can be viewed on a computer using Capture NX (available separately; 103) or the
supplied PictureProject software. NEF (RAW) photographs can not be printed by most print services
or by direct USB connection; use PictureProject or Capture NX to print NEF (RAW) photographs.
When photographs taken at RAW+B are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed.
When photographs taken at this setting are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.
Capture NX ( 103)
Capture NX (available separately) automatically checks for updates if an Internet connection is
detected at startup. Be sure to update to the latest version before viewing NEF (RAW) files.
File Names
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn is a four-
digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the camera, and
xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF (RAW) images or “JPG” for JPEG
images. Files containing Image Dust Off reference data have the extension “.NDF” ( 87). The NEF
and JPEG files recorded at a setting of RAW+B have the same file names but different extensions. Small
copies created with the small picture option in the retouch menu have file names beginning with
“SSC_” and ending with the extension “.JPG” (e.g., “SSC_0001.JPG”), while images recorded with the
other options in the retouch menu have file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001.JPG”).
Images recorded at a Optimize Image > Custom > Color Mode setting of II (AdobeRGB) ( 69)
have names that begin with an underscore (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).
Image Quality ( 30)/Image Size ( 30)
Image quality and size can also be set using the Image quality and Image size options in the shoot-
ing menu.
11— /Fn Button ( 77)
Image quality and size can also be set using the command dial.
32 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a continu-
ous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with a remote control.
11— /Fn Button ( 77)
If Self-timer (the default option) is selected for Custom Setting 11 ( /Fn
button), self-timer mode can also be selected by pressing the self-timer
button.
Controls used
Mode Description
Single frame
(default)
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous
(burst mode)
Camera records photographs at up to about three frames per second while
shutter-release button is pressed. Only one shot will be taken if flash fires;
select Auto (flash off ) mode ( 18) or turn flash off ( 35) for burst pho-
tography. The fastest frame rates can be achieved by choosing manual focus
( 28), rotating the mode dial to S or M and selecting a shutter speed of
1
/250s
or faster ( 41, 43), and using defaults for all other settings.
10s Self-timer Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake ( 33).
2s Delayed remote Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use for self-portraits ( 33).
Quick-response
remote
Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use to reduce blurring caused by
camera shake ( 33).
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue
while photographs are being saved to the memory card. When the buffer is full, the shutter is dis-
abled until enough data have been transferred to the memory card to make room for another photo-
graph. In continuous mode, shooting will continue to a maximum of 100 shots, although the frame
rate will drop once the buffer has filled. See the Appendix for information on the number of photo-
graphs that can be stored in the memory buffer.
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory
buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count display in the
viewfinder while the shutter-release button is pressed.
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Shooting Mode 33
Self-Timer and Remote Control Modes
The self-timer or optional ML-L3 remote control can be used for self-portraits.
Self-timer mode ends when a photograph is taken or the camera is turned off. Single-frame
or continuous shooting mode is automatically restored when self-timer mode ends.
1
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable,
level surface.
2
Select one of the following shooting modes:
Mode Description
10s Self-timer Shutter released about 10s after camera has focused.
2s Delayed remote Shutter released about 2s after camera has focused.
Quick-response
remote
Shutter released when camera focuses.
3
Frame the photograph. If the remote control is used with the camera in autofocus
mode, you can check focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
4
Remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied
DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown. This prevents light entering via
the viewfinder interfering with exposure.
5
Take the photograph.
Self-timer: Press the camera shutter-release button halfway to
focus, then press it the rest of the way down to start the self-
timer. The self-timer lamp will start to blink, stopping two sec-
onds before the photograph is taken.
Remote control: From a distance of 5m (16ft.) or less, aim the
transmitter on the ML-L3 at the infrared receiver on the cam-
era and press the shutter-release button on the ML-L3. In
delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for about
two seconds before the shutter is released. In quick-response
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will flash after the shutter
has been released.
34 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash
Using the Built-in Flash
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit sub-
jects. The flash modes available depend on the mode selected with the mode dial; note
that the built-in flash can not be used in , , or mode. The default flash setting for Dig-
ital Vari-Program modes is automatically restored when the mode dial is rotated to a new
setting or the camera is turned off.
Using the Built-in Flash: , , , , and Modes
Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, and M Modes
Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward until the latch clicks
into place.
Controls used
1
Rotate the mode dial to , , , , or .
2
Choose a flash mode.
3
Take pictures. Unless (off ) is selected, the flash will pop up
as required when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
and fire when a photograph is taken.
1
Rotate the mode dial to P, S, A, or M.
2
Press the button to raise the flash.
3
Choose a flash mode.
4
Choose a metering method and adjust exposure.
5
Take pictures. The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken. To prevent the flash from
firing, lower the flash.
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash 35
Flash Mode
The flash modes available depend on the mode currently selected with the mode dial.
* SLOW is displayed after command dial is released.
Flash modes are described below.
• AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up automatically when shut-
ter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.
• (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. AF-assist lamp lights before flash fires, reducing “red-eye.”
• SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or
under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.
• REAR (rear curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light
behind moving subjects. If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire immediately after shutter opens.
The Button
, , ,
Auto Auto slow sync
Auto+
red-eye
reduction
Off Off
Auto slow
sync+
red-eye
reduction
P, A S, M
Fill flash Fill flash
Red-eye
reduction
Rear-
curtain+
slow
sync
*
Red-eye
reduction
Rear-curtain
sync
Slow sync+
red-eye reduction
Slow sync
Flash mode can also be selected by pressing the button and rotating
the command dial. In P, S, A, and M modes, press the button once to
raise the flash and then select a flash mode by pressing the button and
rotating the command dial.
Custom Settings ( 76, 78)
Use Custom Setting 10 (ISO auto) to adjust sensitivity for optimal flash
output. Custom Setting 14 (Built-in Flash) can be used for manual flash
control.
36 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash
The Built-in Flash
Use with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300mm or non-CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–
200mm ( 97–98). Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. Lenses that block the subject’s view of
the AF-assist lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. The flash has a minimum range of 60cm
(2ft.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.
If the flash fires in continuous shooting mode ( 32), only one picture will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several con-
secutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
For information on optional flash units (Speedlights), see “Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)” ( 99).
See “Flash Compensation” for information on controlling flash level ( 48).
Rear-Curtain Sync
Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens (“front curtain sync”; see below at left). In rear-curtain
sync, the flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light behind mov-
ing subjects.
Front-curtain sync Rear curtain sync
Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/ISO Sensitivity 37
ISO Sensitivity
Photographs taken at slow shutter speeds are prone to blurring. If ISO sensitivity is raised
above the base setting of ISO 100 equivalent, the same exposures can be achieved at faster
shutter speeds, preventing blur. ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and
ISO 1600 in steps of 1EV, with a further high sensitivity setting of HI 1 available for an ISO
equivalent of roughly 3200. (auto) and Digital Vari-Program modes also offer an Auto
setting that allows the camera to automatically raise sensitivity when lighting is poor or
lower sensitivity when lighting is bright. Rotating the mode dial from P, S, A, or M to or a
Digital Vari-Program mode automatically restores the default ISO sensitivity of Auto.
Controls used
Sensitivity
ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light
needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Just as higher
speed films tend to be “grainy,” pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities are prone to mottling.
ISO Sensitivity ( 73)
ISO sensitivity can also be set using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu.
10—ISO Auto ( 76)
This option can be used to enable automatic ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes. When HI 1
is selected, automatic ISO sensitivity control is disabled.
11— /Fn Button ( 77)
ISO sensitivity can also be set using the command dial.
38 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Two-Button Reset
The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values
by holding the and buttons down together for more than
two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green dot). The
monitor turns off briefly while settings are reset. Custom Settings
are not affected.
Two-Button Reset
Controls used: button + button
Option Default Option Default
Image quality ( 30) JPEG Normal Metering ( 45) Matrix
Image size ( 30) Large Flash compensation ( 48) ±0
White balance ( 49)
*
Auto Exposure compensation
( 47)
±0
ISO sensitivity ( 37)
, Digital Vari-Program Auto Flash mode ( 34)
P, S, A, M 100 , , , Auto
Shooting mode ( 32) Single frame Auto slow sync
Focus mode ( 23) AF-A P, S, A, M Fill flash
AF-area mode ( 24) Flexible program ( 40) Off
, , , , , , P, S, A, M Closest subject
Dynamic area
Single area
* Fine-tuning ( 70) reset to 0.
Default Settings
See the Appendix for a list of default settings ( 113).
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes 39
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings, including exposure (
45), white balance, and image optimization. Each of these modes offers a different degree
of control over shutter speed and aperture:
Mode Description
P
Programmed auto
( 40)
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Recom-
mended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to
adjust camera settings.
S
Shutter-priority
auto ( 41)
User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best results. Use to
freeze or blur motion.
A
Aperture-priority
auto ( 42)
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best results. Use to
blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus.
M Manual ( 43)
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to “bulb”
or “--” for long time-exposures.
Lens Aperture Ring
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture
(highest f/-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode M, when aperture can be adjusted manually using
the lens aperture ring (in other modes, the shutter-release will be disabled). The camera exposure
meter and a variety of other features can not be used ( 97).
10—ISO Auto ( 76)
Use this option to enable auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and aperture,
allowing you to freeze or blur motion and control depth of field. The following figure shows how
shutter speed and aperture affect exposure.
Shutter speed Aperture
Fast shutter speed Small aperture (large f-/number)
Slow shutter speed Large aperture (small f/-number)
40 Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Mode P (Programmed Auto)
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations
in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.
To take photographs in programmed auto:
Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be
selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the
command dial to the right for large apertures (small f-/numbers) that blur
background details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Rotate the
command dial to the left for small apertures (large f/-numbers) that
increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All com-
binations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect,
a indicator appears in the viewfinder. To restore default shutter speed
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is no
longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
1
Rotate the mode dial to P.
2
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) 41
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed from values between 30s and ¼,000s
while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure.
Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, high shutter
speeds to “freeze” motion.
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
2
Rotate the command dial until the desired shutter speed is
displayed in the viewfinder (shutter speed can also be dis-
played in the monitor by pressing the button).
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Shutter Speed and Camera Shake
To prevent blur caused by camera shake, the shutter speed should be faster than the inverse of the
focal length of the lens, in seconds (for example, when using a lens with a focal length of 300mm,
choose a shutter speed faster than
1
/300s). A tripod is recommended when shooting at slower shutter
speeds. To prevent blur, try increasing ISO sensitivity ( 37), using the built-in flash ( 34) or an
optional Speedlight ( 99), mounting the camera on a tripod, or using a vibration reduction (VR) lens.
42 Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture from values between the minimum and
maximum for the lens while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will
produce the optimal exposure. Small apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of field,
bringing both the main subject and background into focus. Large apertures (low f/-num-
bers) soften background details.
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
2
Rotate the command dial until the desired aperture is dis-
played in the viewfinder (aperture can also be displayed in the
monitor by pressing the button).
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Mode M (Manual) 43
Mode M (Manual)
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. Shutter speed can
be set to values between 30s and ¼,000s, or the shutter can be held open for indefinitely for
longer exposures ( ). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and max-
imum values for the lens.
To take photographs in manual exposure mode:
Electronic Analog Exposure Display
If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than is selected, the electronic analog
exposure displays in the viewfinder and shooting information display show whether the photograph
would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. If the limits of the exposure metering system are
exceeded, the displays will flash.
When On is selected for Custom Setting 10 (ISO auto; 76), ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted
to compensate for changes in aperture and shutter speed, with the result that changes to shutter
speed and aperture will not affect the electronic analog exposure display.
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Rotate the command dial to choose a shutter speed (see the illustration at left, below).
To set aperture (below right), rotate the command dial while pressing the ( ) but-
ton (to display shutter speed and aperture in the monitor, press the button). Check
exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays (see note below).
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Display Description
Optimal exposure.
If indicator is to right of 0, picture will be underexposed. Display at left indicates
that picture will be underexposed by
1
/3EV.
If indicator is to left of 0, picture will be overexposed. Display at left indicates that
picture will be overexposed by more than 2EV.
44 Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Mode M (Manual)
Long Time-Exposures
Shutter speeds of “bulb” and “--” can be used for long time-exposure photographs of mov-
ing lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. To prevent blurring caused by camera shake,
use a tripod or an optional remote control ( 33, 103).
To prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged battery or an
optional AC adapter ( 103). Note that noise may be present in long exposures; before
shooting, choose On for the Noise reduction option in the shooting menu.
Shutter speed Description
bulb Shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down.
--
Optional remote control required. Select mode M, choose a shutter speed of “bulb,” and
then select delayed remote or quick-response remote mode ( 33). Shutter opens
when the shutter-release button on the remote control is pressed and remains open for
thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time.
35s, f/25
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Exposure 45
Exposure
Metering
The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options
are available when the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M (matrix metering is used in other
modes):
Controls used
Metering
Metering is available with CPU lenses only. In matrix metering, exposure is set using a 420-pixel RGB
sensor. Use a type G or D lens for results that include range information (3D color matrix metering II;
97). With other CPU lenses, 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering II).
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the
lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU lens Type G lens Type D lens
5—Metering ( 75)
Metering can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu.
Method Description
Matrix
Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide area of the frame
and instantly sets exposure according to distribution of brightness, color, dis-
tance, and composition for natural results.
Center-weighted
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area. Clas-
sic meter for portraits.
Spot
Camera meters exposure in active focus area only (if Closest subject is
selected for AF-area mode ( 24), camera will meter center focus area).
Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker.
46 Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Exposure
If the subject is not in the metered area when center-weighted or spot metering is used,
exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background and the main subject may
not be correctly exposed. This can be prevented by using autoexposure lock.
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered
value for exposure.
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and shooting information display. Note that the
metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take
effect when the lock is released).
12—AE-L/AF-L ( 77)
This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button.
13—AE Lock ( 77)
This option controls whether the shutter-release button locks exposure.
Autoexposure Lock Controls used AE-L/AF-L button
1
Select mode P, S, or A and choose center-weighted or spot metering (exposure lock has
no effect in mode M).
2
Position the subject in the selected focus area (when using
center-weighted metering, position the subject in the center
focus area). Press the shutter-release button halfway and con-
firm that the in-focus indicator (z) appears in the viewfinder.
Then, keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway and
the subject positioned in the selected focus area, press the AE-
L/AF-L button to lock exposure.
While exposure lock is in effect, an EL indicator will appear in
the viewfinder.
3
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photo-
graph and shoot.
Mode Setting
Programmed auto Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 40)
Shutter-priority auto Shutter speed
Aperture-priority auto Aperture
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Exposure 47
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure by up to ±5EV in increments of
1
/3EV, mak-
ing pictures brighter or darker. It is available only in P, S, and A modes and is most effective
when used with center-weighted or spot metering ( 45). As a rule of thumb, positive
compensation may be needed when the main subject is darker than the background, neg-
ative values when the main subject is brighter than the background.
The Button
Controls used
Exposure compensation is shown in the shooting information dis-
play. Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure com-
pensation to ±0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
–1EV No exposure compensation +2EV
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted by pressing the button
and rotating the command dial until the desired value is shown in the
viewfinder or shooting information display (P, S, and A modes only). The
viewfinder display is illustrated at right.
–0.3EV
+2.0EV
48 Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/Exposure
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation (available only in P, S, A, and M modes) is used to alter flash output by
from –3EV to +1EV in increments of
1
/3EV, changing the brightness of the main subject rela-
tive to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear
brighter, or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Flash compensation is shown in the shooting information display.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensa-
tion to ±0.0. Flash exposure compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
Flash compensation is also available with SB-400, SB-800, SB-600,
and SU-800 flash units ( 99).
The ( ) Button
8—Flash Compensation ( 76)
Flash compensation can also be adjusted from the Custom Settings menu.
Controls used
Flash compensation can also be adjusted by pressing the ( ) and
buttons and rotating the command dial until the desired value is shown
in the viewfinder or shooting information display. The viewfinder display
is illustrated at right.
–3.0EV
+0.7EV
Reference: P, S, A, and M Modes/White Balance 49
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto
white balance is recommended for most light sources; if necessary, other values can be
selected according to the type of source. The following options are available in P, S, A, and M
modes (Auto is automatically selected in Digital Vari-Program modes):
Controls used
White Balance ( 70)
In addition to selecting white balance, the White balance option in the shooting menu can be used
to fine tune white balance, measure preset white balance, or copy a value for preset white balance
from an existing photograph.
11— /Fn Button ( 77)
White balance can also be set using the command dial.
Option Description
Auto
Camera sets white balance automatically. Recommended for most sit-
uations.
Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent Use under fluorescent lighting.
Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Flash Use with built-in flash or optional Nikon flash units.
Cloudy Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Shade Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
White balance preset
Use gray or white object or existing photograph as reference for white
balance ( 70).
50 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera
More on Playback
Viewing Photographs on the Camera
To view photographs in the monitor, press the button. Photo-
graphs taken in “tall” (portrait) orientation are displayed in tall ori-
entation as shown at right.
The following operations can be performed in full-frame playback:
Auto Image Rotation ( 88)/Rotate Tall ( 66)
These options control whether photographs taken in “tall” orientation are rotated for display in the
monitor during playback.
7—Image Review ( 75)
Choose whether to display photographs as they are taken.
15—Auto Off Timers ( 78)
Choose how long the monitor remains on before turning off automatically to save power.
To Use Description
View additional
photographs
or
Press multi selector to right or rotate command dial right to view
photographs in order recorded. Press multi selector left or rotate
command dial left to view photographs in reverse order.
View photo
information
Press multi selector up or down to view information about current
photograph ( 51).
Zoom in on
photo
Zoom in on current photograph ( 53).
Delete photo Delete current photograph ( 54).
Protect photo ( ) Protect current photograph ( 54).
View thumbnails View multiple photographs ( 52).
Exit to shooting
mode
Shutter button
or
To return to shooting mode, press shutter-release button halfway
or press the button.
View menus View menus ( 63).
Retouch photo Create retouched copy of current photograph ( 89).
Display shooting
information
Display shooting information ( 22).
Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera 51
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback. Press the
multi selector up or down to cycle through the following information: File
Information↔Shooting Data Page 1↔Shooting Data Page 2 ↔Retouch History
(retouched copies only) ↔Highlights↔RGB Histogram↔File Information.
File Information
Shooting Data, Page 1
Shooting Data, Page 2
Retouch History
1
1 Protect status............................ 54 5 File name..................................... 31
2 Retouch indicator .................. 89 6 Image quality............................ 30
3 Frame number/total
number of images
7 Date of recording........... 11, 83
8 Time of recording.......... 11, 83
4 Folder name .............................. 85 9 Image size................................... 30
1 Protect status............................ 54 7 Mode................................................. 4
2 Retouch indicator .................. 89 8 Exposure compensation.... 47
3 Camera name 9 Focal length.................................. 1
4 Metering...................................... 45 10 Flash mode......................... 78, 99
5 Shutter speed...................39–44 11 Frame number/total
number of images 6 Aperture...............................39–44
1 Protect status............................ 54 7 Tone compensation............. 69
2 Retouch indicator .................. 89 8 Sharpening................................. 69
3 Image optimization.............. 68 9 Color mode/hue..................... 69
4 ISO sensitivity
1
......................... 37 10 Saturation.................................... 69
5 White balance/white
balance fine tuning....... 49, 70
11 Image comment
2
.................. 84
12 Frame number/total
number of images 6 Image size/
image quality............................ 30
1.Displayed in red if ISO sensitivity was modified from selected
value by auto ISO.
2.Only first 15 letters are displayed.
1 Protect status.......................................................................................................... 54
2 Retouch indicator ................................................................................................ 89
3 Retouch history: Lists changes made to image using options
in retouch menu ( 89), starting with most recent change.
4 Frame number/total number of images
1.Displayed if image was created using options in retouch menu.
1 2 3
4
7 8 5 9
6
1 2
3
4
5
7
9
6
8
10
11
1 2
12
3
5
7
9
11
4
6
8
10
1 2
4
3
52 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera
Highlights
Histogram
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four or nine images, press
the button in full-frame playback. The following operations can
be performed while thumbnails are displayed:
Highlights are the brightest portions of the image. Details may be
lost (“washed out”) in areas of highlights that are overexposed.
1 Protect status.......................................................................................................... 54
2 Retouch indicator ................................................................................................ 89
3 Highlights (indicated by flashing border)
4 Frame number/total number of images
A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the
image. The horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness, with
dark pixels at the left and bright pixels at the right. The vertical axis
shows the number of pixels of each brightness in the image. Note
that camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ
from those displayed in imaging applications.
1 Protect status............................ 54 3 Frame number/total
number of images 2 Retouch indicator .................. 89
4 Histogram
To Use Description
Display more
images per page
Increase number of images displayed from one (full-frame play-
back) to four or from four to nine.
Display fewer
images per page
Decrease number of images displayed from nine to four or from
four to one (full-frame playback).
View photo View highlighted photograph full frame.
Highlight
photographs
or Use multi selector or command dial to highlight photographs.
Delete photo Delete highlighted photograph ( 54).
Protect photo ( ) Protect highlighted photograph ( 54).
Exit to shooting
mode
Shutter button
or
To return to shooting mode, press shutter-release button halfway
or press the button.
View menus View menus ( 63).
Display shooting
information
Display shooting information ( 22).
1 2
4
3
1 2
4
3
Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera 53
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the button to zoom in on a photograph in full-frame play-
back. The following operations can be performed:
To Use Description
Zoom in and out /
Press to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 25× (large images),
19× (medium images) or 13× (small
images). Press to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, press multi selec-
tor up, down, left, or right to view
areas of image not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed
to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is dis-
played when zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor
is indicated by yellow border.
View other areas
of image
View other
images
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at
current zoom ratio.
Cancel zoom Return to full-frame playback.
Delete photo Delete current photograph ( 54).
Protect photo ( ) Protect current photograph ( 54).
Exit to shooting
mode
Shutter button
or
To return to shooting mode, press shutter-release button halfway
or press the button.
View menus View menus ( 63).
Display shooting
information
Display shooting information ( 22).
54 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the button can be used to protect photo-
graphs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted using the button or
the Delete option in the playback menu, and have DOS “read-only” status when viewed on
a Windows computer. Note that protected files will be deleted when the memory card is
formatted ( 13, 81).
Press the button to protect the photograph currently dis-
played in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the
thumbnail list. The photograph will be marked with a icon.
To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, press the button
when the photograph is displayed in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the
thumbnail list.
Deleting Individual Photographs
Press the button to delete the photograph currently displayed
in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list.
One of the following confirmation dialogs will be displayed; press
the button again to delete the photograph. Press the button
to exit without deleting the photograph.
Delete ( 65)
This option can be used to delete multiple photographs.
Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Connecting to a Computer 55
Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV
Connecting to a Computer
The camera can be connected to a computer using the supplied USB cable. The supplied
PictureProject software can then be used to copy photographs to the computer, where
they can be organized, retouched, and printed.
Before Connecting the Camera
Install PictureProject from the supplied installer CD. To ensure that data transfer is not inter-
rupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before
connecting the camera or use an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector
( 103).
Before connecting the camera, select the USB item in the camera
setup menu and choose a USB option as described below.
* See the websites listed on page x for the latest information on supported operating systems.
†Do NOT select MTP/PTP. If MTP/PTP is selected when the camera is connected, the Windows hard-
ware wizard will be displayed. Click Cancel to exit the wizard, and then disconnect the camera and
select Mass Storage.
Connecting the USB Cable
Computer operating system
*
USB
Windows Vista (32-bit Home Basic/Home Pre-
mium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate editions)
Windows XP (Home Edition/Professional)
Choose MTP/PTP or
Mass Storage
Mac OS X version 10.3.9 or 10.4.x
Windows 2000 Professional Choose Mass Storage

1
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
2
Turn the camera off.
3
Connect the supplied USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect
the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
56 Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Connecting to a Computer
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
Camera Control Pro
Camera Control Pro (available separately; 103) can be used to operate the camera from a computer.
Before connecting the camera, set the camera USB option ( 84) to MTP/PTP. When Camera Con-
trol Pro is running, “PC” will appear in the viewfinder and shooting information display.
Capture NX automatically checks for updates if an Internet connection is detected at startup. Be sure
to update to the latest version.
4
Turn the camera on. The computer will detect the camera
automatically and display PictureProject Transfer. If Mass
Storage is selected for USB, the monitor and viewfinder will
display the indicators shown at right (when MTP/PTP is
selected, the normal shooting indicators are displayed).
5
Transfer photographs to the computer using PictureProject. See the PictureProject Ref-
erence Manual (on CD) for more information.
6
If MTP/PTP is selected for USB, the camera can be turned off and the USB cable dis-
connected once transfer is complete. If Mass Storage is selected, the camera must
first be removed from the system as described below.
Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar ( )
and select Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device.
Windows 2000 Professional
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar ( )
and select Stop USB Mass Storage Device.
Mac OS X
Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D40X”) into the Trash.
Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Printing Photographs 57
Printing Photographs
Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods:
• Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera
(see below).
• Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the printer
manual for details). If the printer supports DPOF ( 117), photographs can be selected for
printing using Print set (DPOF) ( 61).
• Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center. If the center sup-
ports DPOF ( 117), photographs can be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) (
61).
• Transfer pictures ( 55) and print them from a computer using PictureProject or Capture
NX (available separately; 103). Note that this is the only method available for printing
RAW (NEF) pictures.
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
JPEG photographs can be printed directly from a camera connected to a PictBridge printer
( 117). When taking photographs for printing via direct USB connection in P, S, A, and M
modes, choose Ia (sRGB) or IIIa (sRGB) for the Custom>Color mode option in the Opti-
mize image menu ( 68).
Take photographs
Select photographs for printing
using Print set (DPOF) ( 61)
Select MTP/PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer ( 58)
Print photographs
one at a time ( 59)
Print multiple
photographs ( 60)
Create index prints ( 60)
Disconnect USB cable
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
If an error occurs during printing, the camera will display the dialog
shown at right. After checking the printer, press the multi selector up or
down to highlight Continue and press OK to resume printing. Select
Cancel to exit without printing the remaining pages.
RAW (NEF) photographs can not be printed by direct USB connection. They are displayed in the Print
Select menu ( 60) but can not be selected for printing.
58 Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Printing Photographs
Connecting the Printer
Before printing, check that the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the bat-
tery or use an EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector (available separately; 103).
1
Set the camera USB option to MTP/PTP ( 84).
2
Turn the printer on.
3
Turn the camera off.
4
Connect the supplied USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
5
Turn the camera on. A welcome screen will be displayed, fol-
lowed by the PictBridge playback display. Proceed to “Printing
Pictures One at a Time” ( 59) or “Printing Multiple Pictures”
( 60).
Press the multi selector left or right to view additional photographs, or press the but-
ton to zoom in on the current photo ( 53). To view six photographs at a time, press
the button. Use the multi selector to highlight photographs, or press to display
the highlighted photograph full frame.
Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Printing Photographs 59
Printing Pictures One at a Time
To print the picture currently selected in the PictBridge playback
display, press OK. The menu shown at right will be displayed. Press
the multi selector up or down to highlight an option and press to
the right to select.
To start printing, highlight Start printing and press OK. Printing can be interrupted at any
time by pressing OK while printing is in progress. The PictBridge playback display will be
shown when printing is complete.
Option Description
Page size
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi selector
up or down to choose page size from Printer default
(default page size for current printer), 3.5x5in., 5x7in.,
100x150mm, 4x6in., 8x10in., Letter, A3, or A4, then
press OK to select and return to print menu.
No. of
copies
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi selector
up or down to choose number of copies (maximum 99), then
press OK to select and return to print menu.
Border
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi selector
up or down to choose print style from Printer default
(default for current printer), Print with border (print photo
with white border), or No border, then press OK to select and
return to print menu.
Time
stamp
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi selector
up or down to choose Printer default (default for current
printer), Print time stamp (print time and date of recording
on photo), or No time stamp, then press OK to select and
return to print menu.
Cropping
Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit without crop-
ping picture, highlight No cropping and press OK. To crop
picture, highlight Crop and press multi selector right.
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be displayed.
Use and buttons to choose size of crop and use multi
selector to choose position of crop. Press OK to return to print
menu.
Page Size, Border, and Time Stamp
Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only options supported by the current
printer can be selected.
60 Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Printing Photographs
Printing Multiple Pictures
To print multiple pictures or create an index print listing all JPEG
photographs as small thumbnail images, press the button in
the PictBridge playback display. The menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an
option and press to the right to select.
Printing Selected Photographs
Choosing Print select displays the menu shown in Step 1.
Interrupting Printing
To cancel printing and return to the PictBridge playback display, press OK.
Option Description
Print select Print selected pictures (see below).
Print (DPOF) Print current DPOF print order ( 61).
Index print
Create index print of all JPEG photos, to maximum of 256.
Confirmation dialog shown at right will be displayed;
press OK to display menu of print options. Choose page
size, border, and time stamp options as described on pre-
ceding page (warning will be displayed if selected page
size is too small). To start printing, highlight Start print-
ing and press OK. PictBridge menu will be displayed when printing is complete.
Scroll through pictures. To display current pic-
ture full screen, press and hold button.
Select current picture and set number of prints
to 1. Selected pictures marked by icon.
Specify number of prints (up to 99). To deselect
picture, press multi selector down when num-
ber of prints is 1. Repeat Steps 1–3 to select
additional pictures.
Display print options. Choose page size, border,
and time stamp options as described on page
59. To start printing, highlight Start printing
and press OK. PictBridge menu will be displayed
when printing is complete.
1 2
3
4
Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Printing Photographs 61
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print orders” for
PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting Print set (DPOF)
from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Selected Photo-
graphs” to modify and print the current order ( 60). DPOF date and data imprint options
are not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording
on photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.
Highlight Select/set. Display selection dialog.
3
Select pictures and specify number of prints as described in Steps 1–3 on previous page.
Note that RAW (NEF) photos can not be selected for printing.
Display options. Highlight option and press
multi selector right:
• Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture
on all pictures in print order.
• Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pic-
tures in print order.
To complete print order and exit, highlight
Done and press OK.
Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to
store the print order.
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer after the print order is cre-
ated.
1 2
4
62 Reference: Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV/Viewing Photographs on TV
Viewing Photographs on TV
An EG-D100 video cable (available separately; 103) can be used to connect the camera to
a television or VCR for playback or recording. Use of an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5
AC adapter connector is recommended for extended playback ( 103).
1
Choose the appropriate video mode ( 83).
2
Turn the camera off. Always turn the camera off before con-
necting or disconnecting the video cable.
3
Connect the video cable as shown.
Connect to video device Connect to camera
4
Tune the television to the video channel.
5
Turn the camera on and press to begin playback. During
playback, images will be displayed on the television or
recorded to video tape; the camera monitor will remain off.
Menu Guide/ Using Camera Menus 63
Menu Guide
Using Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed from
the camera menus. To view the menus, press the button.
The multi selector and OK button are used to navigate the camera menus.
Choose from playback, shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, and
retouch menus (see below)
Slider shows position in current
menu
If “?” icon is displayed, help for the
current item can be viewed by
pressing button
Current setting for each option is
shown by icon
Current menu item is highlighted
Menu Description
Playback Adjust playback settings and manage photos ( 65).
Shooting Adjust shooting settings ( 68).
Custom Settings Personalize camera settings ( 74).
Setup Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup ( 80).
Retouch Create retouched copies of existing photographs ( 89).
Move cursor up
Increase number
Press up
Press right
Return to previous menu Display sub-menu
Press left
Press down
Make selection
Move cursor down
Decrease number
64 Menu Guide/ Using Camera Menus
To modify menu settings:
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit the menus and return to shooting mode.
The monitor will turn off.
Display menus. Highlight icon for current menu.
Select menu.
Position cursor in selected menu. Highlight menu item.
Display options. Highlight option.
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not cur-
rently available.
Make selection.
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
8
Menu Guide/ Playback Options: The Playback Menu 65
Playback Options: The Playback Menu
The playback menu contains the following options (options dis-
played may differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup
menu option in the setup menu; 80). See “Using Camera
Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus.
Delete
The delete menu contains the following options:
If the number of photographs to be deleted is very large, some time may be needed to
complete the operation.
Selecting Multiple Pictures
To select multiple pictures for deletion:
Option Description
Delete Delete all or selected photos. 65
Playback folder Choose folder for playback. 66
Rotate tall Rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photos during playback. 66
Slide show Play photos back in automatic slide shows. 67
Print set (DPOF) Select photos for printing. 67
Option Description
Selected Delete selected photographs (see below).
All
Delete all photographs in the folder currently selected for
playback.
Highlight picture. To view highlighted picture
full frame, press button.
Select highlighted picture.
Selection shown by icon.
3
Repeat steps 1–2 to select additional pic-
tures. To deselect picture, highlight and
press multi selector down.
Complete operation.
1 2
4
66 Menu Guide/ Playback Options: The Playback Menu
Playback Folder
Choose a folder for playback:
To select the folder to which new photographs will be recorded, use the Folders option in
the setup menu ( 85).
Rotate Tall
Select On to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photos for display in
the camera monitor. Photographs taken with Off selected for
Auto image rotation ( 88) will be displayed in “wide” (land-
scape) orientation.
Option Description
Current
(default)
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Folders in the
setup menu are displayed during playback. This option is
selected automatically when a photo is taken. If a memory card
is inserted and this option selected before photos have been
taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images will
be displayed during playback. Select All to begin playback.
All Play back photos in all folders on the memory card.
Menu Guide/ Playback Options: The Playback Menu 67
Slide Show
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder.
The following options are available:
The following operations can be performed during a slide show:
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or
when the button is pressed to pause playback. Select Restart
to restart the show or Exit to return to the playback menu.
Print Set (DPOF)
Choose Select/set to select photographs for printing on a Pict-
Bridge printer or DPOF-compatible device ( 57). Choose Dese-
lect all? to remove all photos from the current print order.
Option Description
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Start Start slide show.
To Use Description
Skip back/skip ahead
Press multi selector left to return to previous frame, right to skip to
next frame.
View photo info Change photo info displayed ( 51).
Pause slide show Pause slide show.
Exit to playback menu End slide show and return to playback menu.
Exit to playback mode
End slide show and return to full-frame ( 50) or thumbnail play-
back ( 52).
Exit to shooting mode
Shutter
release
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode.
Display shooting
information
Display shooting information ( 22).
68 Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu
Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu
The shooting menu contains the following options (options dis-
played may differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup
menu option in the setup menu; 80). See “Using Camera
Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus.
* Available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
Optimize Image (P, S, A, and M Modes)
Optimize contrast, sharpening, and other settings according to how photographs will be
used or the type of scene.
Option Description
Optimize image
*
Optimize images according to scene. 68–69
Image quality Choose image quality. 70
Image size Choose image size. 70
White balance
*
Adjust colors according to the light source. 70
ISO sensitivity Raise sensitivity when lighting is poor. 73
Noise reduction
Reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities and slow
shutter speeds.
73
Option Description
Normal (default) Recommended for most situations.
Softer
Softens outlines, producing natural results suitable for portraits or retouching
on a computer.
Vivid
Enhances saturation, contrast, and sharpness to produce vivid images with
vibrant reds, greens, and blues.
More vivid
Maximizes saturation, contrast, and sharpness to produce crisp images with
sharp outlines.
Portrait
Lowers contrast while lending natural texture and rounded feel to skin of por-
trait subjects.
Black-and-white Take photos in black-and-white.
Custom Customize image optimization settings ( 69).
Optimize Image
Use a type G or D lens for best results. Results are optimized for current shooting conditions and vary
with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. For consistent results over a series of pho-
tographs, select Custom and choose a setting other than Auto for image sharpening, tone compen-
sation, and saturation.
Settings other than Custom use the sRGB color space.
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. sRGB is for general
use, while Adobe RGB is used in publishing and commercial printing.
N
SO
VI
VI
PO
BW
Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu 69
Customizing Image Enhancement Options: Custom
Select Custom to make separate adjustments to the following options. After adjusting set-
tings, highlight Done and press OK.
• Image sharpening: Choose how much outlines are sharpened dur-
ing shooting. Choose high settings for sharp outlines, low set-
tings for softer outlines.
Default setting: Auto.
• Tone compensation: Control contrast. Lower settings prevent loss
of detail in highlights under harsh lighting or in direct sunlight.
Higher settings preserve detail in misty landscapes and other
low-contrast subjects. Choose Custom to select a user-defined
tone curve created using Camera Control Pro (available sepa-
rately; 103). See the Camera Control Pro manual for details.
Default setting: Auto.
• Color mode: Control color reproduction. Photos taken in modes Ia
and IIIa are adapted to the sRGB color space and are suited for
printing or use “as is,” with no further modification. Choose Ia for
portrait shots and IIIa for nature or landscape shots. Mode II is
adapted to the Adobe RGB color space, which supports a wider
gamut of colors than sRGB. Mode II is the preferred choice for
photos that will be extensively processed or retouched.
Default setting: IIIa (sRGB).
• Saturation: Control the vividness of colors. Choose Moderate for
less saturated colors, Enhanced for more vivid colors.
Default setting: Auto.
• Hue adjustment: Hue can be adjusted between –9° to +9° in incre-
ments of 3° (the degrees refer to the “color wheel” often used to
express hue). Positive values make reds more orange, greens
more blue, and blues more purple. Negative values make reds
more purple, blues more green, and greens more yellow.
Default setting: ±0.
Color Mode
Modes Ia and IIIa are recommended for photos that will be printed without modification or viewed in
applications that do not support color management. If the application supports color management,
choose the Adobe RGB color space when opening photos taken in mode II.
70 Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu
Image Quality
Select image quality ( 30).
Image Size
Choose image size ( 30).
White Balance (P, S, A, and M Modes)
Nine options are available for white balance. See “Reference:
White Balance” ( 49).
Fine-Tuning White Balance
At settings other than White balance preset, white balance can be “fine tuned” by ±3 in
increments of one (see page 118 of the Appendix for color temperature equivalents).
Choose lower values to make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red, higher val-
ues to lend images a bluish tinge.
Selecting an option other than preset in the white balance menu
displays the menu shown at right. Press the multi selector up or
down to select a value for fine tuning; press OK to select and return
to the shooting menu. At settings other than ±0, a “+” or a “–” will
appear next to the white balance icon in the shooting information
display.
Preset White Balance
Preset white balance can be used when the desired results can not be achieved at other
settings or to match white balance to the value used in an existing photograph. Two meth-
ods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method Description
Direct measurement
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in
final photograph and white balance is measured by camera ( 71).
Copy from existing
photograph
White balance is copied from photo on memory card ( 72).
Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu 71
Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final
photograph. A standard gray card can be used as a reference in studio settings. Do
alter exposure from the value selected by the camera; when shooting in mode M, use
the electronic analog exposure display to select optimum exposure.
2
Display the shooting menu and select White balance>
White balance preset (to proceed directly to Step 4 without
displaying the shooting menu, select White balance preset
for white balance in the shooting information display as
described on page 49 and press OK).
3
Highlight Measure and press the multi selector right. The
menu shown at right will be displayed; highlight Yes and
press OK (to set white balance to the last measured value and
exit to shooting mode, highlight No and press OK).
4
The message, “Take photo of white or gray object filling view-
finder under lighting for shooting” will be displayed. When
the message clears from the display, the viewfinder and
shooting information white balance displays will flash as
shown at right. To exit without measuring a preset value,
press and select another option for white balance.
5
Frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down. White bal-
ance can be measured even when the camera is not in focus.
6
If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance,
the message “Data acquired” will be displayed. White balance
will automatically be set to the measured value; no photo-
graph will be recorded.
If the warning shown at right is displayed, the camera was
unable to measure white balance. Return to Step 2 and mea-
sure white balance again.
11— /Fn Button ( 77)
If White balance is chosen for Custom Setting 11 ( /Fn button), pressing the Fn button for about 2s
when preset white balance is in effect will display the indicators shown in Step 4. Measure a value for
preset white balance as described in Steps 5–6.
72 Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu
Copying White Balance from a Photograph
A white balance value copied from an existing photograph can be used for preset white
balance. Select White balance>White balance preset in the shooting menu. The menu
shown in Step 1 will be displayed.
Note that if a new value is measured for white balance, white balance will be set to the mea-
sured value even if Use photo is currently selected in the preset white balance menu.
Highlight Use photo.
*
Display current source photo.
* To use last measured value ( 71), highlight Measure and press multi selector right.
Highlight Select image.

Display folder list.
†To use current source photo, highlight This image and press OK.
Highlight folder. Display images in selected folder.
Highlight photograph.

To view highlighted
picture full frame, press and hold button.
Set preset white balance to value for high-
lighted photograph and return to shooting
menu.
‡Images displayed may include those created with other cameras, but only photographs created
with D40x can be used as source for preset white balance.
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Menu Guide/ Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu 73
ISO Sensitivity
Adjust ISO sensitivity ( 37).
Noise Reduction
Photographs taken at high sensitivities or at shutter speeds of 8s
or slower can be processed to reduce “noise” in the form of mot-
tling or randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Choose from
the following options:
Option Description
On
Photographs taken at ISO sensitivities over ISO 400 or at shutter speeds of about 8s or
slower are processed to reduce noise. In continuous shooting mode, frame rates will slow
and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop. (At shutter speeds of 8s or slower, “Job nr”
will be displayed at the bottom of the viewfinder for a period of time equal to about one-
half to one times the current shutter speed. New photographs can be taken when “Job nr”
clears from the display. Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off
before processing is complete.)
Off
Noise reduction turns off at ISO sensitivities of 800 or less. Minimal noise reduction is still
performed at ISO sensitivities over 800.
74 Menu Guide/ Custom Settings
Custom Settings
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences. The following options are available when
Simple (the default option) is selected for CSM/Setup menu in
the setup menu ( 80):
To display the following options, select Full for CSM/Setup menu:
R: Reset
Select Yes to restore all Custom Settings to their default values.
See the Appendix ( 113) for a complete list of default settings.
1: Beep
At the default setting of On, a beep will sound when the camera
focuses in single-servo AF (AF-S or when shooting stationary sub-
jects in AF-A autofocus mode), while the release timer is counting
down in self-timer and delayed remote modes ( 33), or when a
photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode ( 33). The
beep will not sound when Off is selected. The current setting is
shown in the shooting information display: is displayed when
the beep is on, when it is off ( 6).
Option Option
R Reset 74 4 Shooting mode 75
1 Beep 74 5 Metering 75
2 Focus mode 75 6 No memory card? 75
3 AF-area mode 75
Option Option
7 Image review 75 13 AE lock 77
8 Flash compensation 76 14 Built-in flash 78
9 AF-assist 76 15 Auto off timers 78
10 ISO auto 76 16 Self-timer 79
11 /Fn button 77 17 Remote on duration 79
12 AE-L/AF-L 77
Menu Guide/Custom Settings 75
2: Focus Mode
Select a focus mode ( 23).
3: AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus area in autofocus mode
( 24, 25).
4: Shooting Mode
Select from single-frame, continuous, self-timer, and remote con-
trol mode ( 32).
5: Metering (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Choose how the camera meters exposure ( 45).
6: No Memory Card?
If Release locked (the default setting) is selected, the shutter-
release is disabled when no memory card is inserted. Choose
Enable release to enable the shutter-release button when no
memory card is inserted. Photographs will be displayed with the
word “Demo” in the monitor but will not be saved.
7: Image Review
If On (the default setting) is selected, photographs will automati-
cally be displayed in the monitor after shooting (the length of
time photographs are displayed depends on the option selected
for Custom Setting 15: Auto off timers). If Off is selected, photo-
graphs can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the button.
76 Menu Guide/ Custom Settings
8: Flash Compensation (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Adjust flash level ( 48).
9: AF-assist (All Modes Except and )
If On (the default setting) is selected and the subject is poorly lit,
the AF-assist illuminator will light when required to assist the focus
operation ( 23). Choose Off to disable the AF-assist illuminator.
Note that when the illuminator is off, the camera may not be able
to focus on poorly-lit subjects using autofocus.
10: ISO Auto (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
If Off (the default setting) is selected, ISO sensitivity will remain
fixed at the value selected by the user ( 37). If On is selected,
ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure
can not be achieved at the selected value (flash level is adjusted
appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be
selected using the Max. sensitivity option. In modes P and A,
sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected
for Min. shutter speed (slower shutter speeds may be used if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected for maximum sensitivity).
When On is selected, the viewfinder and shooting information
display show ISO-AUTO. Unless a flash is used, these indicators blink
when sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.
Note that noise is more likely at higher sensitivities.
ISO Auto
Auto ISO control is not available at an ISO sensitivity of HI 1. Foreground subjects may be
underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright
background. Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select mode A or M and choose a larger
aperture.
Menu Guide/Custom Settings 77
11: /Fn Button
Choose the function performed by the Fn button.
At settings other than Self-timer (the default option), the shooting information display will
show a icon to the left of the setting that can be adjusted by pressing the Fn button and
rotating the command dial (“Classic” display only; 81).
12: AE-L/AF-L
Choose the function performed by the AE-L/AF-L button.
13: AE Lock
If Off (the default option) is selected, pressing the shutter-release
button halfway does not lock exposure. If On is selected, expo-
sure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Option Description
Self-timer
(default)
Press the Fn button to select self-timer mode ( 33).
Shooting
mode
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select
shooting mode ( 32).
Image
quality/size
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select
image quality and size ( 29).
ISO
sensitivity
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select ISO
sensitivity ( 37).
White
balance
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select
white balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 49).
Option Description
AE/AF lock
(default)
Both focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected.
AF lock only Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Exposure is unaffected.
AE lock hold
Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked until the button is
pressed again or the exposure meters turn off.
AF-ON
The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can not be used to
focus.
78 Menu Guide/ Custom Settings
14: Built-in Flash (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Choose a flash control mode for the built-in flash or the optional
SB-400 Speedlight.
TTL (default): Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions.
Manual: The flash fires at the level selected in the menu shown at
right. At full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 13/43
(ISO 100, m/ft., 20°C/68°F).
A icon flashes in the viewfinder and shooting information dis-
play when Manual is selected.
The Optional SB-400 Speedlight
When an optional SB-400 Speedlight is attached, Custom Setting 14 is
used to choose the flash control mode for the SB-400 and the name
changes to Optional Speedlight.
15: Auto off Timers
Choose how long the monitor and exposure meters ( 14)
remain on when no operations are performed. Choose a shorter
auto off delay for longer battery life.
Note that the shooting information display turns off automatically when the exposure meters
turn off. When a remote control is used ( 33), the monitor and exposure meters remain on
for the length of time selected for Custom Setting 17 (Remote on duration; 79).
Auto Off
Regardless of the setting chosen, the exposure meters do not turn off automatically when the camera
is powered by an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103). The camera does
not turn off automatically when connected to a computer ( 55) or PictBridge printer ( 57).
Option Description
Short
Monitor and exposure meters remain on for 4s. When Image review is on, pictures are
displayed in monitor for 4s after shooting ( 75).
Normal
(default)
Monitor and exposure meters remain on for 8s. When Image review is on, pictures are
displayed in monitor for 4s after shooting ( 75).
Long
Monitor remains on for 20s; exposure meters remain on for 1minute. When Image
review is on, pictures are displayed in monitor for 20s after shooting ( 75).
Custom
Choose monitor off delay and image review time from 4s, 8s, 20s, 1minute, and
10minutes. Choose auto meter-off delay from 4s, 8s, 20s, 1minute, or 30minutes.
Menu Guide/Custom Settings 79
16: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter-release delay in self-timer mode
( 33). The default setting is 10s.
17: Remote on Duration
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote
modes ( 33). Choose shorter times for longer battery life. The
default setting is one minute.
80 Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
The setup menu contains the options listed below (options dis-
played may differ if My menu is selected for CSM/Setup menu.)
See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for more information on using
the menus.
CSM/Setup menu
Choose the options displayed in the menus.
To choose menu items for display with My menu:
The following options are available when
Simple (the default option) is selected for
CSM/Setup menu:
To display the following additional options,
select Full for CSM/Setup menu:
Option
Option Folders 85
CSM/Setup menu 80–81 File no. sequence 86
Format memory card 81 Mirror lock-up 86
Info display format 81–82 Firmware version 86
Auto shooting info 83 Dust off ref photo 87
World time 83 Auto image rotation 88
LCD brightness 83
Video mode 83
Language 84
Image comment 84
USB 84
Option Description
Simple
(default)
Display only basic options in the Custom Settings ( 74) and
setup menus (see above). Other menus list all options.
Full Display all options.
My menu Display only selected options.
1
Highlight My menu and press the multi selector right. A list
of menu names will be displayed.
2
Highlight a menu name and press the multi selector right.
The items in the selected menu will be listed as shown at right
(the illustration shows the items listed when the playback
menu is selected). The CSM/Setup menu item in the setup
menu can not be selected.
Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 81
Format Memory Card
Info Display Format
3
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight items and
then press to the right to select or deselect. Selected items
are indicated by a check mark.
4
Highlight Done and press OK to return to the list of menu
names shown in Step 1. Repeat steps 2–3 to edit additional
menus.
5
Highlight Done in the list of menu names and press OK to
return setup menu.
Select Yes to format the memory card. Note that this permanently
deletes all photographs and any other data the card may contain.
Be sure that any valued files have been copied to a computer
before formatting.
Formatting Memory Cards
Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while formatting is
in progress.
Choose one of the following shooting information display formats
for Digital Vari-Program ( , , , , , , , and ) modes and
P, S, A, and M modes. Note that choosing Classic also changes the
background color for the menus. Wallpaper uses the same
menu background as the Graphic format.
Classic Graphic Wallpaper
82 Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
Classic format is shown below.
The design of the Wallpaper format is the same as the Graphic
display except that a user-selected photograph is displayed in the
background and the shutter speed and aperture displays do not
appear ( 6). To choose a photograph for the Wallpaper format:
1 Mode........................................................................................4 10 Electronic analog exposure display................... 43
2 Shutter speed.......................................................... 39–44 Exposure compensation........................................... 47
3 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ................................. 76 11 Aperture (f/-number).......................................... 39–44
4 Optimize image indicator ........................................ 68 12 Flash sync mode............................................................ 35
5 Focus area display......................... 14, 16, 24, 25, 26 13 Exposure compensation value............................. 47
AF-area mode .................................................................. 24 14 Help indicator..................................................................... 3
6 “Beep” indicator .............................................................. 74 15 Flash compensation value ...................................... 48
7 Battery indicator............................................................. 15 16 Metering mode.............................................................. 45
8 Number of exposures remaining.............. 15, 116 17 AF-area mode.................................................................. 24
Preset white balance recording indicator ...... 71 18 Focus mode...................................................................... 23
PC mode indicator........................................................ 56 19 Shooting mode.............................................................. 32
9 Manual flash control indicator............................... 78 20 ISO sensitivity................................................................... 37
Flash compensation indicator for
optional Speedlight .................................................. 101
21 White balance mode.................................................. 49
22 Image size.......................................................................... 30
23 Image quality................................................................... 30
1
Highlight Select wallpaper and press the multi selector
right. The photographs on the memory card will be displayed
as shown at right.
2
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight a photograph.
To view the highlighted photograph full screen, press and
hold the button.
3
Press OK to select the highlighted picture and return to the setup menu. The camera
will store the new wallpaper and use it in the shooting display whenever Wallpaper is
selected. Any existing wallpaper (including the default image provided with the cam-
era) is deleted when a new image is selected and can not be restored. Wallpaper can
not be viewed during playback or copied to a memory card.
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
12
13
11
10
9
8 7 6 5
4
3
2
1
21
22
23
Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 83
Auto Shooting Info
Choose whether to automatically display shooting information in
the monitor in Digital Vari-Program ( , , , , , , , and )
modes or P, S, A, and M modes. Select On to automatically display
shooting information after the shutter-release button is released.
If Custom Setting 7 (Image review) is off, shooting information will
also be displayed after a photograph is taken. Turn Auto shoot-
ing info on if you find yourself frequently checking camera settings. Note that even if On is
selected, the monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed.
World Time
Set the camera clock to the current date and time.
LCD Brightness
Adjust monitor brightness between –2 (darkest) and +2 (bright-
est).
Video Mode
Choose NTSC when connecting the camera to an NTSC television
or VCR. Choose PAL when connecting the camera to a PAL video
device.
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged as
necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5 AC
adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103). Three days of charging will power the clock for
about one month. If “Clock not set” is displayed in the monitor, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset to a time starting at 2007.01.01.00:00:00. Set the clock to the correct date and
time.
Option Description
Time zone
Choose the time zone. The camera clock will automatically
be reset to the time in the selected zone.
Date
Set the camera clock ( 11). Reset the clock regularly for
accurate time keeping.
Date
format
Choose the order in which the month, day, and year are
displayed.
Daylight
saving time
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock is
automatically advanced or set back one hour.
84 Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
Language
Choose the language for camera menus and messages from:
Image Comment
Add a comment to photographs as they are taken. Comments
can be viewed in Capture NX (available separately; 103) or
PictureProject.
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: The following dialog will be displayed. Input a
comment as described below.
• Attach comment: A comment is added to all photographs taken while this option is checked.
Highlight this option and press the multi selector to the right to toggle the check mark on
or off.
USB
Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge
printer. Choose MTP/PTP when connecting to a PictBridge
printer or using Camera Control Pro (available separately). See
“Connecting to a Computer” for information on selecting a USB
option for use with PictureProject ( 55).
De Deutsch German Pt Português Portuguese
En English English Ru Russian
Es Español Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish
Fi Suomi Finnish Traditional Chinese
Fr Français French Simplified Chinese
It Italiano Italian Japanese
Nl Nederlands Dutch Korean
Pl Polski Polish
Image Comment
Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters, press OK to select.
Name area: Comment appears here. To move cursor, rotate command
dial.
Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. Any additional characters will be deleted. To
delete the character at the current cursor position, press . Press to save changes and return to
the image comment menu, or press to exit without changing the comment.
Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 85
Folders
Create, rename, or delete folders or choose the folder in which
new photographs will be stored.
• Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photo-
graphs will be stored.
• New: Create a new folder and name it as described in “Naming Folders,” below.
• Rename: Select a folder from a list and rename it as described in “Naming Folders,” below.
• Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.
Folder Names
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned automati-
cally by the camera (e.g., 100ND40X). Each folder can contain up to 999 photographs. During shoot-
ing, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the selected name. If a photograph is
taken when the current folder if full or contains a photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create
a new folder by adding one to the current folder number (e.g., 101ND40X). The camera treats folders
with the same name but different folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON
is selected for Select folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON,
102NIKON, etc.) will be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder ( 66). Renaming
changes all folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact.
ND40X (default
folder)
Current folder
Other folders (in
alphabetical order)
Naming Folders
Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters, press OK to select.
Name area: Folder name appears here. To move cursor, rotate com-
mand dial.
Folder names can be up to five characters long. Any additional characters will be deleted. To
delete the character at the current cursor position, press . Press to save changes and return to
the setup menu, or press to exit without creating a new folder or changing the folder name.
86 Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
File No. Sequence
Choose how the camera names files.
• Off (default): File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is
created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is
inserted.
• On: File numbering continues from the last number used after a
new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a pho-
tograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will begin again
from 0001.
• Reset: As for On, except that file numbering is reset to 0001 with the next photograph
taken (if the current folder already contains photographs, a new folder will be created).
File Numbering
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999,
the shutter release will be disabled and the monitor and viewfinder displays will show that the card is
full. If File no. sequence is on, turn it off and format the memory card or insert another memory card
in the camera.
Mirror Lock-Up
Lock the mirror in the up position when inspecting or cleaning
the low-pass filter that protects the camera image sensor ( 105).
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 87
Dust off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture
NX (available separately; for more information, see the Capture NX
manual).
1
Highlight On and press OK. The message shown at right will
be displayed and “rEF” will be appear in the viewfinder.
2
With the lens ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless white object,
frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter-release but-
ton halfway. In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual
focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera
may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and
the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose
another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.
Image Dust Off
Dust off ref photo is available with CPU lenses only. A lens with a focal length of at least 50mm is
recommended. If using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
The same reference image can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be
viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed
when reference images are viewed on the camera; histograms and
highlights are not displayed.
Image Dust Off is used to reduce the effects of dust in NEF (RAW)
photographs. See the Capture NX manual for more information.
88 Menu Guide/ Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On (the default option) is selected con-
tain information on camera orientation, allowing them to be
rotated automatically during playback ( 50) or when viewed in
Capture NX (available separately; 103) or PictureProject.
*
The
following orientations are recorded:
* In continuous mode ( 32), orientation recorded for first shot applies to all images in same burst,
even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when taking
photographs with the lens pointing up or down.
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 89
Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed,
resized, or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory
card. The following options are available (options displayed may
differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup menu option in
the setup menu; 80). See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for
more information on using the menus.
* Not available with photographs taken with Black-and-white selected for Optimize image.
Except in the case of Image overlay, the photographs to be retouched can be selected in
full-frame playback or from the retouch menu. In full-frame playback:
* Image overlay is not available during full-frame playback.
†If sub-menu is displayed, repeat Steps 3–4 to select options from sub-menu. To exit to full-frame
playback without creating modified copy, press button.
Option Description
D-lighting
*
Brighten dark or back-lit subjects or produce effects similar to the flash. 90
Red-eye correction
*
Correct “red-eye” caused by the flash. 91
Trim Create cropped copies of existing photographs. 91
Monochrome
*
Copy pictures in black-and-white, sepia, or cyanotype. 92
Filter effects
*
Create copies with color filter effects. 92
Small picture Create small copies of existing photographs. 92–93
Image overlay Combine two RAW photographs into a single image. 94–95
Display photo in full-frame playback ( 20, 50). Display retouch menu.
Highlight menu item. * Display retouch options.

Retouching Copies
Copies created with Small picture or Trim can not be further modified. D-lighting, red-eye correc-
tion, and filter effects can not be applied to monochrome copies. Otherwise the options in the
retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies, although this may result in loss of quality.
Image Quality
Small picture creates JPEG Fine copies (1: 4 compression ratio). Image overlay creates copies at the
current image quality setting. Other options copy RAW photos as JPEG Fine quality images; save
where otherwise noted, copies created from RAW photos are 3,872×2,592 pixels in size.
1 2
3 4
90 Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu
To create retouched copies from the retouch menu:
* To view selected picture full frame, press and hold button.
†To exit to playback mode without creating modified copy, press button.
D-Lighting
Press the multi selector up or down to choose the amount of cor-
rection performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit dis-
play. Press OK to copy the photograph and return to full-frame
playback.
Highlight menu item. Display selection screen.
Highlight photo. * Display retouch options.

Retouching Photographs
The D40x may be unable to display or retouch photographs that were created with other models of
camera or that have been modified using a computer or other device.
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it
ideal for dark or back-lit photographs.
Before After
1 2
3 4
Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 91
Red-Eye Correction
Selecting this option displays a preview image as shown below. Confirm the effects of red-
eye correction and create a corrected copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare cir-
cumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye; check the
preview thoroughly before proceeding. Red-eye correction is available only with photo-
graphs taken using the flash.
Trim
Choosing this option displays the selected image full frame as shown below. To create a
cropped copy of the selected image:
To Use Description
Zoom in and out /
Press to zoom in, to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, press multi selector
up, down, left, or right to view areas of
image not visible in monitor. Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other
areas of frame. Navigation window is dis-
played while / buttons or multi selector is pressed; area currently
visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border.
View other areas
of image
Create copy
If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph, a copy will
be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy will
be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye.
Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) +JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG Fine;
cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. Depending on
the size of the crop, the copy may be 2,560×1,920, 1,920×1,440, 1,280×960, 960×720, or 640×480
pixels in size.
To Use Description
Zoom in and out /
Press to zoom in, to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, press multi selector
up, down, left, or right to view areas of
image not visible in monitor.
View other areas
of image
Create copy
Save the area currently visible in the monitor as a separate file and
return to full-frame playback.
92 Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu
Monochrome
Choose from Black-and-white, Sepia, and Cyanotype (blue
and white monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of the selected
image; press the multi selector up to increase color saturation,
down to decrease. Press OK to create a monochrome copy and
return to full-frame playback.
Filter Effects
Choose from the following options. After adjusting filter effects as
described below, press OK to copy the photograph and return to
full-frame playback.
Small Picture
Create a small copy of the selected picture. The following sizes are available:
The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on page 89.
The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from the retouch menu,
however, differs from that described at the beginning of this section: instead of selecting a
single photograph and then choosing a picture size, the user selects a picture size first and
then selects one or more photographs to copy at the selected size as described on the fol-
lowing page.
Option Description
Skylight
Creates the effect of a sky light filter, making the picture less
blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at
right.
Warm
filter
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the copy
“warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the monitor.
Color
balance
Press the multi selector up to increase the amount of green,
right to increase the amount of red, left to increase the amount
of blue, or down to increase the amount of magenta. The effect
is displayed in the monitor together with red, green, and blue
histograms giving the distribution of tones in the copy ( 52).
Option Description
640×480 Suited to television playback.
320×240 Suited to display on Web pages.
160×120 Suitable for e-mail.
Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 93
Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1. Fol-
low the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures.
* To return to Step 7 without creating copies, highlight No and press OK. Press MENU to exit to retouch
menu without creating copies.
Highlight Choose size. Display options.
Highlight desired picture size. Make selection and return to previous menu.
Highlight Select picture. Display selection screen.
Select pictures ( 65). Selected pictures are
marked with icon.
Confirmation dialog displayed.
Highlight Yes. * Copy photos and exit to full-frame playback.
Viewing Small Pictures
Small pictures are indicated by a gray border during playback. Playback zoom is not available when
small pictures are displayed.
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
94 Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing RAW photographs to create a single picture that is
saved separately from the originals. The new picture is saved at current image quality and
size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size ( 30; all options are
available). To create a RAW image, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press the
multi selector right. The preview dialog shown at right will be
displayed with Image 1 highlighted.
2
Press OK. A picture selection dialog will be displayed.
3
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the first pho-
tograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph
full frame, press and hold the button.
4
Press OK to select the highlighted image and return to the pre-
view display. The selected image will appear as Image 1.
5
Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing the multi selec-
tor up or down to select the gain for image 1 from between
0.1 and 2.0. The default value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in
half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The effects of gain are
visible in the Preview column.
6
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Image 2.
Repeat Steps 2–5 to select the second photo and adjust gain.
Menu Guide/ Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 95
7
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the Preview
column. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight one
of the following options and press OK.
• Overlay: Preview the overlay as shown at right. Press OK to save
the new image. To return to Step 6 and select new photos or
adjust gain, press .
• Save: Save the overlay without viewing a preview.
After an overlay is created, the camera will enter full-frame play-
back ( 50) with the new picture displayed in the monitor.
Image Overlay
Only RAW photographs created with the D40x can be selected for image overlay. Other images are
not displayed on the selection screen.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture,
exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white
balance and optimize image as the photograph selected for Image 1.
96 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories
Technical Notes
Optional Accessories
One advantage of digital SLR cameras is the wide variety of accessories they support. See
our web sites or product catalogs for up-to-date information on accessories for the D40x.
Flash units (Speedlights)
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-
NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
Picture Angle and Focal Length
The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm camera
is 36×24mm. The size of the area exposed by the
D40x, in contrast, is 23.6×15.8, meaning that the
picture angle of a 35-mm camera is approxi-
mately 1.5 times that of the D40x. The approxi-
mate focal length of lenses for the D40x in 35-mm
format can be calculated by multiplying the focal
length of the lens by about 1.5.
Picture size (D40x)
Picture size (35-mm format)
Lens
(23.6 mm × 15.8 mm)
Picture diagonal
(36 mm × 24 mm)
Picture angle (35-mm format)
Picture angle (D40x)
AC adapters
Batteries
Viewfinder accessories
ML-L3 remote control
Lenses
Software
Filters
AC adapter connectors
Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 97
Lenses
Autofocus is supported only with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses, which are equipped with an
autofocus motor. IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used; other CPU lenses (including AF
lenses not equipped with an autofocus motor) can be used in manual focus mode. CPU
lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts ( 45), AF-S and AF-I lenses by
“AF-S” or “AF-I” at the beginning of the lens name.
The following CPU lenses can be used with the D40x.
Type G and D Lenses
Type G and D AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses ( 45) are recommended for use with the D40x. Type G and D
lenses support 3D color matrix metering II ( 45). Vibration reduction is available with Type G and D
VR lenses only.
Non-CPU Lenses
The non-CPU lenses listed below may be used, but only when the camera is in mode M. Selecting
another mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture
ring; the camera autofocus system, metering, electronic analog exposure display, and TTL flash control
can not be used. Except where otherwise noted, the electronic range finder can be used with lenses
that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Camera setting Focus Mode Metering
Lens/accessory
AF
MF (with electronic
range finder)
MF
Digital Vari Program,
P, S, A
M
, ,
1
AF-S, AF-I Nikkor 9 9 9 9 9 9
PC-Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8D
2
— 9
3
9 — 9 9
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter
4
9
5
9
5
9 9 9 9
Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF) — 9
6
9 9 9 9
AI-P Nikkor — 9
7
9 9 9 9
1. Spot metering meters selected focus area.
2. Camera exposure metering and flash control may not function when
lens is shifted and/or tilted or aperture is not at maximum.
3. Electronic range finder can not be used when shifting or tilting lens.
4. Compatible with the following lenses:
• AF-S VR Micro ED: 105mm f/2.8G IF (autofocus not supported)
• AF-S VR ED: 70–200mm f/2.8G IF, 200mm f/2G IF, 300mm f/2.8G IF,
200–400mm f/4G IF
• AF-S ED: 80–200mm f/2.8D IF, 300mm f/2.8D II IF, 300mm f/2.8D IF,
300mm f/4D IF
*
, 400mm f/2.8D II IF, 400mm f/2.8D IF, 500mm f/4D
II IF
*
, 500mm f/4D IF
*
, 600mm f/4D II IF
*
, 600mm f/4D IF
*
• AF-I ED: 300mm f/2.8D IF, 400mm f/2.8D IF, 500mm f/4D IF
*
,
600mm f/4D IF
*
* Autofocus not available with TC-17E II/TC-20E II AF-S teleconverter.
5. With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
6. If AF 80–200mm f/2.8S, 35–70mm f/2.8S, new-model 28–85mm
f/3.5–4.5S,or 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S is zoomed while focusing at mini-
mum range, image on matter screen in viewfinder may not be in focus
when in-focus indicator is displayed. Focus manually using image in
viewfinder as guide.
7. With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
• AI-modified, AI-, AI-S, or Series E Nikkor
• Medical Nikkor 120mm f/4 (can only be used at shut-
ter speeds slower than 1/125s)
• Reflex Nikkor (electronic range finder can not be used)
• PC Nikkor (electronic range finder can not be used
when shifting or tilting lens)
• AI-type teleconverter
*
• PB-6 Bellows focusing attachment (attach in vertical
orientation; can be used in horizontal orientation
once attached)
*
• Auto extension rings (PK 11A, 12, 13; PN-11)
*
* Electronic range finder can be used if maximum effective aperture is
f/5.6 or faster.
98 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories
Incompatible Non-CPU Lenses and Accessories
Do NOT attempt to use the following non-CPU lenses and accessories. Failure to observe this precau-
tion could result in damage to the camera or lens.
AF-Assist Illumination/Red-Eye Reduction
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:
At ranges under 1m (3ft. 3in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and interfere
with autofocus when lighting is poor:
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator can interfere with red-eye reduction.
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300mm. The flash may be
unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:
• TC-16A AF Teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm
f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• Old-model 21mm f/4
• K2 rings
• ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2.8, 200mm f/3.5, TC-16
Teleconverter)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• Old-model PC 35mm f/3.5
• Old-model 1000mm f/6.3 Reflex
• 1000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• 2000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers 200111–200310)
• AF-S VR ED 70–200mm f/2.8G
• AF-S VR ED 300mm f/2.8G
• AF-S ED 80–200mm f/2.8D
• AF-S VR ED 200–400mm f/4G
• AF-S VR ED 200mm f/2G
• AF-S VR ED 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G
• AF-S DX IF ED 17–55mm f/2.8G
• AF-S ED 17–35mm f/2.8D
• AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2.8D
• AF-S DX VR ED 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G
Lens Zoom position Min. range
AF-S DX ED 12–24mm f/4G
20mm 3.0m / 9ft. 10in.
24mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
AF-S ED 17–35mm f/2.8D
24mm 2.0m / 6ft. 7in.
28mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
35mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S DX ED 17–55mm f/2.8G
28mm 1.5m / 4ft. 11in.
35mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
45–55mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF ED 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D
24mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
28–35mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S DX ED 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G
18mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
24–70mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D
24mm 2.5m / 8ft. 2in.
28mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
35mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S VR ED 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G
24mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
28–120mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2.8D
35mm 1.5m / 4ft. 11in.
50–70mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S VR ED 200–400mm f/4G
250mm 2.5m / 8ft. 2in.
300–400mm 2.0m / 6ft. 7in.
AF-S DX ED 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G
18mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
24–135mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
AF-S DX VR ED 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G
24mm 1.0m / 3ft. 3in.
35–200mm 0.6m / 2ft. 3in.
Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 99
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The accessory shoe allows SB-series Speedlights, including the SB-
400, 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, 23, 22S, and 29S to be mounted
directly on the camera without a sync cable. It is equipped with a
safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin, such as the SB-800
and SB-600. Before attaching an optional flash unit, remove the
accessory shoe cover. The built-in flash will not fire when an
optional Speedlight is attached.
When used with compatible flash units such as the optional SB-400, SB-800, and SB-600
Speedlights or SB-R200 wireless remote Speedlight, the D40x supports the advanced Nikon
Creative Lighting System (CLS), including i-TTL flash control and Flash Color Information
Communication. See the Speedlight manual for details.
SB-400, SB-800, and SB-600 Speedlights
These high-performance Speedlights have Guide Numbers of 21/69 (18-mm zoom cover-
age), 38/125 (35-mm zoom head position), and 30/98 (35-mm zoom head position) respec-
tively (m/ft, ISO 100, 20°C/68°F). The flash head can be rotated through 90° above the
horizontal for bounce-flash or close-up photography. The SB-800 and SB-600 can also be
rotated 180° left and 90° right, and the SB-800 can be rotated 7° below the horizontal. The
SB-800 and SB-600 support auto power zoom (24–105mm and 24–85mm, respectively),
ensuring that the illuminating angle is adjusted in accord with lens focal length and have
both a built-in wide panel that can be used for an angle of 14mm (the SB-800 also supports
17mm) and an illuminator that can be used when adjusting settings in the dark.
SB-R200 Wireless Remote Speedlight
This high-performance wireless remote Speedlight has a Guide Number of 14/49 (m/ft, ISO
200, 20°C/68°F; GN at ISO 100 is 10/32). Although it can not be mounted directly on the
accessory shoe, it can be controlled using an optional SB-800 Speedlight or SU-800 wireless
Speedlight commander. The SB-R200 can be hand-held, placed on an AS-20 Speedlight
stand, or mounted on the camera lens using the SX-1 attachment for remote control and
close-up i-TTL photography.
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
The SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-800, 600, or R200 flash units. The
SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. For exam-
ple, at ISO 100 the SB-400 has a Guide Number of 21m or 69ft.; its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is
21÷5.6 or about 3.7 meters (or in feet, 69÷5.6=12ft. 4in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity,
multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
100 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:
The following Speedlights can only be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes at shutter
speeds of
1
/200s or slower. Flash charge state is shown by the Speedlight flash-ready indica-
tor. In TTL mode, the shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be taken.
Speedlight
SB-400 SB-800 SB-600
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Commander Remote
Flash mode/feature SB-800 SU-800
1
SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
i-TTL
2
9
3, 4
9
3
9
3
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
AA Auto aperture
2
— 9
6
— 9
7
9
8
9
8
— —
A Non-TTL auto — 9
6
— 9
7
— 9
7
— —
GN Range-priority manual — 9 — — — — — —
M Manual 9
4
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
RPT Repeating flash — 9 — 9 9 9 9 —
REAR Rear-curtain sync 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Red-eye reduction 9 9 9 9 — — — —
Flash Color Information Communication 9 9 9 9 — — — —
AF-assist for multi-area AF
2
— 9 9 9 9 — — —
Auto zoom — 9 9 9 — — — —
Auto ISO 9 9 9 — — — — —
1. Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.
2. CPU lens required.
3. Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used with spot metering or when
selected with Speedlight. Otherwise i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digi-
tal SLR is used.
4. Can be selected from camera Custom Settings menu ( 78).
5. i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR.
6. Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode. Non-TTL auto is selected
automatically when a non-CPU lens is attached.
7. Auto aperture is selected automatically if CPU lens is attached. Non-
TTL auto is selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached.
8. Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode.
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the accessory shoe
could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before
using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized service representative
for more information.
The AS-15 Accessory Shoe Adapter
When the AS-15 accessory shoe adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.
Speedlight SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24
SB-50DX
1
, SB-23, SB-29
2
SB-21B
2
, SB-29s
2
SB-30, SB-27
3
, SB-22S,
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto 9 — 9
M Manual 9 9 9
RPT Repeating flash 9 — —
REAR Rear-curtain sync
4
9 9 9
1. In P, S, A, and M modes, lower built-in flash and use optional Speed-
light only.
2. Autofocus is available only with AF-S VR ED 105mm f/2.8G IF Micro
Nikkor lenses.
3. When mounted on D40x, flash mode is automatically set to TTL and
shutter release is disabled. Set Speedlight to A (non-TTL auto) mode.
4. Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 101
Notes on Optional Speedlights
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports the Creative Light-
ing System, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D40x is not included in
the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional Speedlight is attached with the camera in , , , , , , or mode, the built-in
flash will turn off and the optional Speedlight will fire whenever a photograph is taken. The following
flash modes are available:
• , , , , , and modes: Fill flash and red-eye reduction. Fill flash is automatically selected if
the flash mode is set to off or auto when an optional Speedlight is attached. Auto with red-eye
reduction becomes red-eye reduction.
• mode: Auto slow sync becomes slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction becomes slow
sync with red-eye reduction, and off becomes slow sync.
The optional Speedlight will not fire when the camera is in mode.
If AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in , , , , , , or modes or On is selected for Custom
Setting 10 (ISO auto) in P, S, A, or M mode, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal flash output when
an optional SB-400, SB-800, or SB-600 Speedlight is attached. This may result in foreground subjects
being underexposed in photographs taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or
against a bright background. Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or choose a larger aperture.
The shutter will synchronize with an external flash at speeds of
1
/200s or slower.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. Higher values may not pro-
duce the desired results at some ranges or apertures. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about three
seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be
underexposed.
The SB-400, SB-800, and SB-600 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 pro-
vide AF-assist illumination (the SU-800 does not provide AF-assist illumination in close-up mode).
With other Speedlights, the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye
reduction. If the controls on the SB-800, SB-600, or SU-800 are used to adjust flash compensation,
will appear in the camera shooting information display.
In the following modes, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) varies with ISO sensitivity:
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped down by half an f/-
stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aper-
ture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure
may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot metering to select stan-
dard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL mode, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the Speedlight. Do not use other
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure. Auto power zoom is available
only with SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights.
Mode
Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of
100 200 400 800 1600
P, , , , , , 4 4.8 5.6 6.7 8
5.6 6.7 8 9.5 11
102 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories
Other Accessories
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D40x. All
cards of the designated make and capacity can be used, regardless of speed.
Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. Contact the manufacturer for details
on the above cards.
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
• Diopter adjustment viewfinder lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0,
+0.5, +1, +2, and +3m
–1
. Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not
be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to +0.5m
–1
). Test diopter
adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved.
• DG-2 magnifier: Magnify the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for close-up
photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks that require added precision.
Eyepiece adapter required (available separately).
• Eyepiece adapter: Attach the DG-2 magnifier to the D40x.
• DR-6 right-angle viewing attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder
eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the cam-
era is in portrait orientation.
Filters
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use
Nikon filters; other filters may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding.
• The D40x can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular polarizing
filter instead.
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
• When using an R60 filter, set exposure compensation to +1.
• Moiré may occur if a filter is used when the subject is framed against a bright light or
when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors (filter fac-
tors) over 1× (Y48, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND4S, ND8S, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).
Memory Cards
• Format memory cards in the camera before first use.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory cards from
the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or
while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to observe these precau-
tions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not expose to heat, water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
SanDisk 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB
*
, 4GB
*†
Toshiba 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB
*
, 4GB
*†
Panasonic 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB
*
, 4GB
*†
Lexar 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB (Platinum II/Professional), 2GB (Platinum II/Professional)
*
* If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device
supports 2GB and 4GB cards.
† SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or
other device, check that device supports SDHC.
Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 103
Accessories for the D40x
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D40x. Up to date
information is available at Nikon websites or from our latest product catalogs.
Connecting the Optional EP-5 AC Adapter Connector and EH-5 AC Adapter
See the EP-5 and EH-5 instruction manuals for more information on using an AC adapter.
Power
sources
• EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion battery: Additional EN-EL9 batteries are available from local
retailers and Nikon service representatives.
• EH-5 AC adapter: Use to power the camera for extended periods. EP-5 AC adapter connec-
tor required (available separately).
• EP-5 AC adapter connector: Connect the EH-5 to the D40x.
Body caps
• BF-1A body cap: The BF-1A keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of
dust when a lens is not in place.
Video cables • EG-D100 video cable: View photos on TV or record them to video tape ( 62).
Remote
controls
• ML-L3 wireless remote control: Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits or to prevent
blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3V CR2505 battery.
Software
• Capture NX: A complete photo editing package with support for RAW images.
• Camera Control Pro: Control the camera from a computer and save photos to disk.
Note: Capture NX and Camera Control Pro automatically check for updates if an Internet
connection is detected at startup. Be sure to update to the latest version.
1
Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber (c) and
power-connector (d) covers.
2
Insert the EP-5 into the battery chamber as shown at right,
making sure the “+” and “–” terminals are in the correct orien-
tation.
3
Guide the power cord into the opening left by the power con-
nector cover and close the battery-chamber cover.
4
Insert the EH-5 AC adapter plug into the EH-5 AC inlet (e) and connect the EH-5 DC
plug to the EP-5 DC in connector (f). When the camera is powered by the AC
adapter, the battery-level indicator in the monitor will show .
1 2 3 4 5
ᕡᕡᕡ
ᕢᕢᕢ
ᕣᕣᕣ
ᕤᕤᕤ
104 Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, turn the camera off, remove the
battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent
mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store the camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or
radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122°F (for example, near a space heater or in a
closed vehicle in a hot day) or below –10°C (14°F)
Cleaning
Camera
body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using
the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in
distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera
may cause damage not covered under warranty.
Lens,
mirror, and
viewfinder
These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a
blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid.
To remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe
the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could
result in damage or malfunction.
The Monitor
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and to prevent
liquid crystal from the monitor from entering your eyes or mouth.
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The D40x is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be
inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that
it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspec-
tion and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the
camera is inspected or serviced.
Technical Notes/ Caring for the Camera 105
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass filter to
prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you
can clean the filter as described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate
and easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel. To prevent the camera from powering off while the mirror is raised, use a
full-charged battery or an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103).
Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera turns off with the mirror raised, the
curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off until cleaning or inspection is complete. Do not remove or disconnect
the power source while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the AF-assist illuminator will
blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two min-
utes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.
1
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.
2
Select Mirror lock-up from the setup menu (note that this option is not available at
battery levels of or below).
3
Highlight On and press OK. The message shown at right will
be displayed. To restore normal operation without inspecting
the low-pass filter, turn the camera off.
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror
will be raised and the shutter curtain will open, revealing the
low-pass filter.
5
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter,
examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 7.
6
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do not
use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the filter.
Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no
circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter.
7
Turn the camera off. The mirror will be lowered and the shutter curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
106 Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to
strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunc-
tion if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of
humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in tem-
perature, such as occur when entering or leaving a heated
building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a car-
rying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden
changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this
device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static
charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment
such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens
pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an
extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor
to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photo-
graphs.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is
extremely thin and easily damaged. Under no circum-
stances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it
with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear
the curtain.
Handle all moving parts with care: Do not apply force to the bat-
tery-chamber, card-slot, or connector covers. These parts
are especially susceptible to damage.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power
source: Do not unplug the product or remove the battery
while the product is on or while images are being recorded
or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances
could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to
another while the AC adapter is connected.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to
gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft,
dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in
pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint
should be gently removed with a blower. When using an
aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of
liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the
lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and
wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” ( 105) for information on clean-
ing the low-pass filter.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a
dry, well-ventilated area. If the product will not be used for
an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage
and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as
this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desic-
cant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and
should be replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage
at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the
shutter a few times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal
cover before putting the battery away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels
that are always lit or that do not light. This is common to all
TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction.
Images recorded with the product are unaffected.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright
light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause
damage or malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be
removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping
lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the mon-
itor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken
glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touch-
ing the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the cam-
era from functioning and should be removed with a soft,
dry cloth before use. After removing the battery from the
camera, be sure to replace the terminal cover.
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs
on important occasions, ready a spare EN-EL9 battery and
keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice.
Technical Notes/ Caring for the Camera 107
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs
outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold
battery may recover some of its charge.
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe due caution when handling the battery.
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the
low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D40x, however, is designed to be used with inter-
changeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged.
Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure
to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other for-
eign matter that may be adhering to the body cap.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter or have it cleaned by autho-
rized Nikon service personnel ( x). Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the
filter can be retouched using Capture NX (available separately; 103) or the clean image options
available in some third-party imaging applications.
108 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page numbers in the
right-most column for more information.
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras
Problem Solution
Camera takes time to turn on. Delete files or folders. 20, 65
Viewfinder is out of focus.
Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjust-
ment lenses.
14, 102
Displays turn off without warning. Choose a longer auto off delay. 78
Camera stops functioning.
See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras,”
below.

Display in viewfinder is unrespon-
sive and dim.
The response times and brightness of the viewfinder
display varies with temperature.

Menu item is not displayed. Select Full for CSM/Setup menu. 80
Menu item can not be selected.
Rotate mode dial to another setting or insert memory
card.
4, 12
Image size can not be changed. Image quality set to RAW or RAW+B. 30
Metering can not be changed. Autoexposure lock in effect. 46
Can not measure white balance. Subject is too dark or too bright. 71
Image can not be selected as source
for preset white balance.
Image was not created with D40x. 72
Full range of shutter speeds not
available.
Flash in use. 117
Can not select focus area.
• Closest subject selected for AF-area mode: choose
another mode.
• Press shutter-release button halfway to activate
exposure meters.
24
14
Focus does not lock when shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus in AF-C autofocus
mode or when photographing moving subjects in
AF-A mode.
23, 26
In extremely rare instances, a strong external static charge may cause the
camera may stop functioning. Turn the camera off, remove and replace
the battery (note that the battery may be hot) or disconnect and recon-
nect the AC adapter, and turn the camera on again. If the problem per-
sists, turn the camera off and press the reset switch (see right; note that
this resets the clock). In the event of continued malfunction, contact your
retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Reset
switch
Connector
cover
Technical Notes/Troubleshooting 109
Problem Solution
Image in viewfinder is not in focus.
• Manual focus selected: if AF-S or AF-I lens is attached,
choose autofocus mode. Otherwise focus manually.
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual
focus or focus lock.
• Lens is not AF-S or AF-I: use manual focus.
28, 97
26, 28
28, 97
AF-assist illuminator does not light.
• Mode dial rotated to or : select another mode.
• AF-assist lamp does not light for manual focus or
continuous-servo autofocus. Choose AF-S.
• Center focus area is not selected: select center focus
area
• Choose On for Custom Setting 9 (AF-assist).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator
may become hot with continued use; wait for lamp
to cool down.
4, 18–19
23
25
76

Shutter release is disabled.
• Memory card is full, locked, or not inserted.
• Flash is charging.
• Camera is not in focus.
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached without lock-
ing aperture at highest f/-number.
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial
to M.
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of bulb
selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed.
12, 13,
15
17
23
8, 39
39, 43,
45
41, 43
No photo taken when remote con-
trol shutter-release button is
pressed.
• Replace battery in remote control.
• Choose remote control mode.
• Flash is charging.
• Time selected for Custom Setting 17 (Remote on
duration) has passed: reselect remote control
mode.
• Bright light is interfering with remote.
103
33
17
79

Only one shot taken each time shut-
ter-release button is pressed in con-
tinuous shooting mode.
Continuous shooting is not available when built-in
flash is required.
32, 34,
36
Camera is slow to record photos. Turn noise reduction off. 73
Date of recording is not correct. Set camera clock. 11
Final photo is larger than area
shown in viewfinder.
Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is
approximately 95%.

Randomly-spaced bright pixels
(“noise”) appears in photographs.
• Lower ISO sensitivity or use noise reduction.
• Shutter speed is slower than 8s: use noise reduction.
37, 73
73
Reddish areas appear in photos.
Reddish areas may appear in long time-exposures.
Turn noise reduction on when shooting at shutter
speeds of “bulb” or “--”.
44, 73
110 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Colors are unnatural
• Select mode P, S, A, or M and adjust white balance to
match light source.
• Select mode P, S, A, or M and adjust Optimize image
settings.
39, 49
39, 68
Flashing areas appear in images.
Press multi selector up or down to choose photo infor-
mation displayed.
51 Shooting data appear on images.
A graph appears during playback.
RAW image is not played back. Photo was taken at image quality of NEF+JPEG. 30
• Some photos are not displayed
during playback.
• Message displayed stating that no
images are available for playback.
Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current will
automatically be selected when next photo is taken.
66
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos
are displayed in “wide” (landscape)
orientation.
• Select On for Rotate tall.
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image
rotation.
• Camera orientation was changed while shutter-
release button was pressed in continuous shooting
mode.
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was
taken.
66
88
88
88
Can not retouch photo.
• Some retouch options can not be applied to copies.
• Photo created or modified with other device.
89
90
Can not delete photo. Photo is protected: remove protection. 54
Can not change print order. Memory card is full or locked. 13, 15
Can not select photo for printing.
Photo is in RAW (NEF) format. Transfer to computer
and print using PictureProject or Capture NX.
55, 57
Can not print pictures via direct USB
connection.
Set USB to MTP/PTP. 58, 84
Photo is not displayed on TV. Choose correct video mode. 62, 83
Can not copy photos to computer. Choose correct USB option. 55
Can not use Capture NX. Update software to latest version. 31, 103
Can not use Camera Control Pro.
• Set USB to MTP/PTP.
• Update software to latest version.
55, 56
103
Technical Notes/Troubleshooting 111
Camera Error Messages and Displays
This section lists common warning indicators and error messages that appear in the view-
finder and monitor.
Message Viewfinder Solution
Lock lens aperture ring at
minimum aperture (largest f/-
number).
(blinks)
Lock ring at minimum aperture (largest f/-number). 8, 39
Lens not attached.
/
(blinks)
• No lens attached: attach lens.
• Attached lens is not CPU lens: select mode M.
8
39,
43, 45 Attach a lens.
/
(blinks)
Initialization error. Turn
camera off and then on again. (blinks)
Turn camera off, remove and reinsert battery, and
then turn camera on again.

This battery cannot be used.
Choose battery designated
for use in this camera.
(blinks)
Insert EN-EL9 battery.
7, 9–
10
Shutter release disabled.
Recharge battery. (blinks)
Turn camera off and recharge battery or replace
with fully-charged spare battery.
9–10,
15
Battery level is low. Complete
operation and turn camera
off immediately.

End cleaning or inspection of low-pass filter and
turn camera off immediately.
105
Clock not set.
(blinks)
Set camera clock. 11
No SD card inserted. Insert memory card. 12–13
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write” position. (blinks)
Slide card write-protect switch to “write” position. 13
This memory card cannot be
used. Card may be damaged.
Insert another card.
(blinks)
• Use Nikon-approved card.
• Card may be damaged. Contact retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
• Delete unwanted files or insert new memory card.
102
x
12–13,
20, 65
This card is not formatted.
Format the card. (blinks)
Format memory card. 13, 81
Card is full.
(blinks)
• Reduce image quality or size.
• Delete photographs and/or reset sequential file
numbering.
• Insert new memory card.
29–30
20,
65, 86
12
Subject is too bright.
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity.
• Increase shutter speed.
• Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number).
• Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.
37
39–44
39–44
102
Subject is too dark.
• Choose higher ISO sensitivity.
• Use flash.
• Decrease shutter speed.
• Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number).
37
34
39–44
39–44
112 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting
Help
A blinking is displayed in the monitor or viewfinder indicates that a description of the current prob-
lem can be viewed by pressing the button.
Message Viewfinder Solution

(blinks)
Flash has fired at full power. View photo; if underex-
posed, adjust settings and try again.
20, 45,
48, 50,
76, 78

/
(blinks)
• Built-in flash is lowered: raise built-in flash
• Reduce distance to subject, use larger aperture, or
increase ISO sensitivity or flash range.
• Flash head on optional SB-400 Speedlight is in
bounce-flash position.
• SB-400 is unable to fully illuminate subject at cur-
rent lens focal length. Increase distance to subject
(this warning is not displayed with other optional
Speedlights).
34
37,
39–44
99
99
Flash is in TTL mode. Choose
another setting or use a CPU
lens.
(blinks)
Change flash control mode for optional Speedlight. 100
No Bulb in S mode.
(blinks)
Change shutter speed or select mode M. 39–44
(blinks)
Unable to measure preset white
balance. Please try again. (blinks)
Camera unable to measure preset white balance.
Adjust exposure settings and try again.
47, 70
FOLDER CONTAINS NO
IMAGES.

• Insert another memory card.
• Set Playback folder to All.
12
66
FILE DOES NOT CONTAIN
IMAGE DATA.
— Delete file or reformat memory card.
13,
20, 65
CHECK PRINTER. —
Insert new ink or toner cartridge in printer. If error
occurs with ink remaining in printer, check printer
status.
60
Error. Press shutter release
button again. (blinks)
Press shutter-release button again. If error persists,
consult with Nikon-authorized service representa-
tive.
x,
16–17
Initialization error. Contact
Nikon-authorized service rep-
resentative.
(blinks)
Contact Nikon-authorized service representative. x
Technical Notes/ Appendix 113
Appendix
The Appendix covers the following topics:
• Available Settings and Defaults ............................................................................................................................... 113
• The Command Dial......................................................................................................................................................... 115
• Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size ................................................................................................. 116
• Exposure Program (Mode P)....................................................................................................................................... 116
• Flash Control.................................................................................................................................................................... 117
• Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash............................................................................................... 117
• Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range.................................................................................................................. 117
• Supported Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 117
• White Balance and Color Temperature................................................................................................................... 118
Available Settings and Defaults
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.
P S A M
S
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

m
e
n
u
Optimize image
9 9 9 9
Image quality
1
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Image size
1
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
White balance
1
9 9 9 9
ISO sensitivity
1
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Noise reduction 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
C
u
s
t
o
m

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
2
1: Beep
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
2: Focus mode
1
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
3: AF-area mode
1
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9 9 9 9
4: Shooting mode
1
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
5: Metering
1
9 9 9 9
6: No memory card? 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
7: Image review 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
8: Flash compensation
1
9 9 9 9
9: AF-assist 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10: ISO auto 9 9 9 9
11: /Fn button 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
12: AE-L/AF-L 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
13: AE lock 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
14: Built-in flash 9 9 9 9
15: Auto off timers 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
16: Self-timer 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
17: Remote on duration 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
O
t
h
e
r

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Flash mode
1
9
3
9
3
9
4
9
3
9
4
9
3
9
3
9 9 9 9
Autoexposure lock
1
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9 9 9
Exposure compensation
1
9 9 9 9
6
Flexible program
1, 3
9
1. Reset with two-button reset ( 38).
2. Reset with Custom Setting R (Reset).
3. Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
4. Available with optional Speedlight only.
5. Autoexposure lock not recommended in these modes.
6. Affects electronic analog exposure display only; shutter speed and
aperture are not affected.
114 Technical Notes/Appendix
The following defaults are restored with Custom Setting R (Reset):
1. Max. sensitivity set to 800, Min. shutter speed set to 1/30s.
Defaults for other settings are listed below.
* Auto slow sync.
P S A M
C
u
s
t
o
m

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
1: Beep On
2: Focus mode AF-A
3: AF-area mode Closest subject Dynamic Single Closest subject
4: Shooting mode Single frame
5: Metering Matrix
6: No memory card? Release locked
7: Image review On
8: Flash compensation — 0.0
9: AF-assist On — On — On
10: ISO auto — Off
1
11: /Fn button Self-timer
12: AE-L/AF-L AE/AF lock
13: AE lock Off
14: Built-in flash — TTL
15: Auto off timers Normal
16: Self-timer 10s
17: Remote on duration 1min.
P S A M
P
l
a
y
b
a
c
k
Playback folder Current
Slide show: Frame intvl 2s
Rotate tall On
S
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

m
e
n
u
Optimize image — Normal
Image quality JPEG normal
Image size Large
White balance Auto
ISO sensitivity AUTO 100
Noise reduction Off
S
e
t
u
p

m
e
n
u
CSM/Setup menu Simple
Info display format Graphic
Auto shooting info Off
World time 2007.01.01.00:00:00 (format and time zone vary with region of sale)
LCD brightness 0
Video mode Varies with region of sale
Language Varies with region of sale
Image comment —
USB Mass storage
Folders ND40X
File no. sequence Off
Auto image rotation On
O
t
h
e
r

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Focus area
— Center —
Focus lock Off
Flexible program — Off —
AE lock hold Off
Exposure compensation — 0.0
Flash mode Auto — Auto — Auto — Auto Slow
*
Fill flash
Technical Notes/ Appendix 115
The Command Dial
The command dial can be used in alone or in combination with other controls to adjust the
following settings. Changes to the affected setting are visible in the viewfinder and shoot-
ing information display.
Exposure
Choose a combination of aperture and shutter
speed (flexible program, mode P; 40).
Choose a shutter speed (modes S and M; 41, 43).
Set aperture (mode A; 42).
+
Set aperture (mode M; 43).
Set exposure compensation (modes P, S, and A
47).
Flash settings
+
Choose a flash mode ( , , , , , P, S, A, and
M modes; 34–36).
+
Set flash compensation (P, S, A, and M modes;
48).
Fn button (available when the following options are selected for Custom Setting 11; 77)
+
Shooting mode
Image quality/size
ISO sensitivity
White balance
116 Technical Notes/Appendix
Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 1GB
Panasonic Pro HIGH SPEED memory card at different image quality and size settings.
1.All figures are approximate and assume average file size; actual file size and memory card capacity
may vary with scene recorded and make of memory card. If enough memory remains for over 999
photographs, the camera will display the number of exposures remaining in thousands (“K”); for
example, “1.5K” is shown if enough memory remains for 1,500 exposures.
2.Maximum number of frames that can be taken before shooting stops. Actual number of frames may
vary with make of memory card. Additional photographs can be taken as soon as enough memory
is available in memory buffer.
3.Total file size of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.
Exposure Program (Mode P)
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph.
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph assumes an ISO
sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used, values over 16
1
/3EV are reduced to
16
1
/3EV.
Image quality Image size File size (MB)
1
Number of images
1
Burst capacity
1, 2
RAW — 9.0 79 6
FINE
L 4.8 129 100
M 2.7 225 100
S 1.2 487 100
NORMAL
L 2.4 251 100
M 1.3 431 100
S 0.6 888 100
BASIC
L 1.2 487 100
M 0.7 839 100
S 0.3 1500 100
RAW+BASIC —/L 10.1
3
70 6
F (lens focal length) ≤55mm
135mm≥F>55mm
F>135mm
A
p
e
r
t
u
r
e
Shutter speed
Technical Notes/ Appendix 117
Flash Control ( 99–101)
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination
with the built-in flash or optional SB-400, SB-800, or SB-600 Speedlights.
• i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance between
the main subject and the background.
• Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the
brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for use with
exposure compensation, for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at the
expense of background details, or when using an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional
Speedlight. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.
Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
The following shutter speeds are available when the built-in flash is used.
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely used in
the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures
to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.21: The D40x supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still
Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with photographs is used
for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer
industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transfer-
ring them to a computer.
Mode Shutter speed Mode Shutter speed
, , , P, A
1
/200–
1
/60s S
1
/200–30s
1
/200–
1
/125s M
1
/200–30s,
1
/200–1s
Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range
100 200 400 800 1600 m ft.
1.4 2 2.8 4 5.6 1.0–7.5 3ft. 3in.–24ft. 7in.
2 2.8 4 5.6 8 0.7–5.4 2ft. 4in.–17ft. 9in.
2.8 4 5.6 8 11 0.6–3.8 2ft.–12ft. 6in.
4 5.6 8 11 16 0.6–2.7 2ft.–8ft. 10in.
5.6 8 11 16 22 0.6–1.9 2ft.–6ft. 3in.
8 11 16 22 32 0.6–1.4 2ft.–4ft. 7in.
11 16 22 32 — 0.6–0.9 2ft.–2ft. 11in.
16 22 32 — — 0.6–0.7 2ft.–2ft. 4in.
118 Technical Notes/Appendix
White Balance and Color Temperature
Approximate color temperatures for each white balance setting are given below (values
may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters):
* Color temperature range reflects wide variation among fluorescent light sources, ranging from low-
temperature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.
White balance
Fine tuning
None –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3
Auto 3,500K–8,000K Fine tuning added to value selected by camera
Incandescent 3,000K 3,300K 3,200K 3,100K 2,900K 2,800K 2,700K
Fluorescent
*
4,200K 7,200K 6,500K 5,000K 3,700K 3,000K 2,700K
Dir. sunlight 5,200K 5,600K 5,400K 5,300K 5,000K 4,900K 4,800K
Flash 5,400K 6,000K 5,800K 5,600K 5,200K 5,000K 4,800K
Cloudy 6,000K 6,600K 6,400K 6,200K 5,800K 5,600K 5,400K
Shade 8,000K 9,200K 8,800K 8,400K 7,500K 7,100K 6,700K
White balance preset — Not available
Technical Notes/ Specifications 119
Specifications
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses
Effective pixels 10.2 million
CCD 23.6×15.8mm; total pixels: 10.75 million
Image size (pixels) • 3,872×2,592 (Large) • 2,896×1,944 (Medium) • 1,936×1,296 (Small)
Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF contacts
Compatible lenses
*
Type G or D AF Nikkor
AF-S, AF-I All functions supported
Other Type G or D Nikkor All functions supported except autofocus
PC Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8D Can only be used in mode M; all other functions supported except autofocus
Other AF Nikkor

/AI-P Nikkor All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color matrix metering II; electronic
range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster.
Non-CPU Can be used with manual focus in mode M, but exposure meter does not function;
electronic range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster.
*IX Nikkor lenses can not be used †Excluding lenses for F3AF
Picture angle Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1.5 times lens focal length.
Viewfinder Fixed eye-level penta-Dach mirror type
Diopter –1.7–+0.5m
-1
Eyepoint 18mm (–1.0m
-1
)
Focusing screen Type B BriteView clear matte screen Mark V with superimposed focus brackets
Frame coverage Approximately 95% of lens (vertical and horizontal)
Magnification Approximately 0.8× (50-mm lens at infinity; –1.0m
-1
)
Reflex mirror Quick return
Lens aperture Electronically controlled with instant return
Self-timer Electronically controlled timer with 2, 5, 10 or 20s duration
Focus-area selection Focus area can be selected from 3 focus areas
Lens servo • Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-
S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated automatically according
to subject status
• Manual focus (M)
Storage
Media SD (Secure Digital) memory cards; camera supports SDHC
File system Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0 and Digital Print Order
Format (DPOF)
Compression • NEF (RAW): compressed 12-bit • JPEG: JPEG baseline-complaint
Autofocus TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM 530 autofocus sensor module with AF-assist
illuminator (range approximately 0.5–3.0m/1ft. 8in.–9ft. 10in.)
Detection range –1.0–+19EV (ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F)
AF-area mode Single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF)
or by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button
ISO sensitivity (Recom-
mended Exposure Index)
100–1600 in steps of 1EV with additional setting one step over 1600
120 Technical Notes/Specifications
Exposure
Metering Three-mode through-the-lens (TTL) exposure metering system
Matrix 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU
lenses); metering performed by 420-pixel RGB sensor
Center-weighted Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center of frame
Spot Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on active focus area
Range (ISO 100 equivalent,
f/1.4 lens, 20°C/68°F)
0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering)
2–20EV (spot metering)
Exposure meter coupling CPU coupling
Digital Vari-Program/
exposure modes
Digital Vari-Program ( auto, auto/no flash, portrait, landscape, child,
sports, close-up, night portrait); programmed auto (P) with flexible program;
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual (M)
Exposure compensation –5–+5EV in increments of
1
/3 EV
Exposure lock Exposure locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button
Shutter Electronically controlled vertical-travel focal plane shutter
Speed 30–¼,000s in steps of
1
/3 EV, bulb
White balance Auto (TTL white balance with 420-pixel RGB sensor); six manual modes with fine tun-
ing and preset white balance
Built-in flash • , , , , : Auto flash with auto pop-up
• P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide number (m/ft) • Approximately 12/39 at ISO 100 and 20°C/68°F (manual 13/42)
Flash
Sync contact X-contact only; flash synchronization at shutter speeds of up to
1
/200 s
Flash control
TTL TTL flash control by 420-pixel RGB sensor. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR and
standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR available when CPU lens is used with built-in
flash, SB-400, SB-800, and SB-600
Auto aperture Available with SB-800 and CPU lens
Non-TTL auto Available with such Speedlights as SB-800, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, and 22s
Range-priority manual Available with SB-800
Flash mode • , , , : Auto, auto with red-eye reduction; fill-flash and red-eye reduction
available with optional Speedlight
• : Auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync; slow sync with red-eye
reduction and slow sync available with optional Speedlight
• , : Fill-flash and red-eye reduction available with optional Speedlight
• P, A: Fill flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync with red-eye reduction, slow sync, rear-cur-
tain with slow sync
• S, M: Fill flash, red-eye reduction, rear-curtain sync
Flash compensation –3–+1EV in increments of
1
/3 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or SB-series Speedlight such as 400, 800, or 600 is fully
charged; blinks for about 3s after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with sync, signal, and ground contacts and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System
Supported with built-in flash, SB-400, SB-800, and SB-600; Advanced Wireless Lighting
supported with SB-800 or SU-800 as Commander.
Monitor 2.5in., 230,000-dot, low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with brightness adjustment
Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL
External interface Hi-Speed USB
Tripod socket ¼in. (ISO 1222)
Firmware upgrades Firmware can be upgraded by user
Technical Notes/ Specifications 121
Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at an ambi-
ent temperature of 20°C (68°F).
EN-EL9 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Battery Life
Battery life varies with charge state and shooting conditions. The number of shots that can be taken
with a fully-charged EN-EL9 battery (1000mAh) is approximately 520 shots in single-frame shooting
mode and 2,000 shots in continuous shooting mode. Battery life for single frame shooting mode is
measured according to CIPA standards (lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and shutter
released at default settings once every 30s; flash fired with every other shot). Battery life for continu-
ous shooting mode is measured with image quality set to JPEG Basic, an image size of M, a shutter
speed of ½50s, the shutter release pressed halfway for three seconds and focus then cycled from infin-
ity to minimum range three times; after six shots, the monitor is turned on for five seconds and then
turned off; the cycle is repeated once exposure meters have turned off. All measurements are per-
formed with an 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens.
The following can reduce battery life:
To ensure maximum battery performance:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.
The battery level displayed by the camera may vary with changes in temperature.
Specifications
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Supported languages Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish
Power source • One rechargeable Nikon EN-EL9 Li-ion battery; charging voltage (MH-23 quick
charger): 7.4V DC
• EH-5 AC adapter (available separately; requires optional EP-5 AC adapter connector)
Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximately 126×64×94mm (5.0×2.5×3.7in.)
Approximate weight 495g (1lb. 1oz.) without battery, memory card, or body cap
Operating environment
Temperature 0–+40°C (+32–104°F)
Humidity Less than 85% (no condensation)
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.4V/1000mAh
Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximately 36×56×14mm (1.4×2.2×0.6in.)
Approximate weight 51g (1.8oz.), excluding power cable
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed half-
way
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking RAW (NEF) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using vibration reduction with VR lenses
122 Technical Notes/Specifications
MH-23 Quick Charger
18–55 mm f/3.5–5.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor Lens (Available Separately)
The minimum aperture available when a 18-55 mm f/3.5-5.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens is used
with the D40x is f/36.
Rated input AC 100–240V, 50/60Hz
Rated output DC 8.4V/0.9A
Supported batteries EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time Approximately 90 minutes
Operating temperature 0–+40°C (+32–104°F)
Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximately 82.5×65×28mm (3.2×2.6×1.1in.)
Length of cord Approximately 1.8m (5ft. 11in.)
Approximate weight 80g (2.8oz.), excluding power cable
Type G-type AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens with built-in CPU and Nikon mount
Supported cameras Nikon DX-format digital cameras
Focal length 18–55mm
Max. reproduction ratio 1: 3.5–5.6
Construction 7 elements in 5 groups (including 1 ED glass element and 1 aspherical element)
Angle 76°–28° 50´
Zoom positions 18, 24, 35, 45, 55
Distance information Supplied to camera body
Zoom Zoom adjusted by rotating lens ring
Focus Autofocus with low-noise motor; manual focus
Min. focus distance 0.28m (11in.) at all zoom positions
Aperture Seven blade diaphragm with auto aperture
Aperture range f/3.5–22 (18mm zoom); f/5.6–38 (55mm zoom)
Metering Maximum aperture
Filter diameter 52mm (P=0.75mm)
Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximately 70.5mm diameter ×74mm/2.8×3.0in. from standard bayonet mount
surface to front of lens
Approximate weight 205g (7.2oz.)
Lens hood HB-33 (available separately; attaches as shown below)
Index 123
Index
Symbols
3D color matrix metering II.
See Metering
420-pixel RGB sensor. See
Metering; White balance
(aperture) button, 2, 43
(auto/flash off mode), 4, 18
(child mode), 4, 19
(close-up mode), 4, 19
(continuous shooting indi-
cator), 6, 32
(delete) button, 3, 20, 54
/Fn button (Custom Set-
tings menu), 77,115
(exposure compensation),
5, 6, 47
(exposure compensation)
button, 2, 47
(flash compensation), 5, 6,
48
(flash compensation) but-
ton, 2, 48
(flash-ready indicator), 5,
17, 111–112
(flash mode) button, 2, 34
? (help) button, 3
? (help indicator), 3, 111–112
(landscape mode), 4, 18
(night portrait mode), 4, 19
(playback) button, 3, 20, 50
(playback zoom) button, 3,
50, 52, 53
(portrait mode), 4, 18
(protect) button, 3, 54
(remote control indicator),
32, 33
(self-timer) button, 2, 33
(self timer indicator), 32, 33
(sports mode), 4, 19
(thumbnail) button, 3, 50,
52, 53
A
A. See Aperture-priority auto
Accessories. See also Battery;
Lens; Flash, optional
optional, 96–103
supplied, 7
(AE-L/AF-L) button, 3, 46, 77
Adobe RGB. See Color mode
Advanced Wireless Lighting,
100
AE-L/AF-L (Custom Settings
menu), 77
AE lock (Custom Settings
menu), 77
AF-A. See Focus, mode
AF-area mode. See Focus, AF-
area mode
AF-area mode (Custom Set-
tings menu), 24, 75
AF-assist (Custom Settings
menu), 76
AF-assist illuminator, 2, 23, 76
AF-C. See Focus, mode
AF-S. See Focus, mode
AF-S/AF-I. See Lens, AF-S/AF-I
Aperture, 6, 39–44, 117
maximum, 28, 42, 43,101
minimum, 8, 39, 42, 43
Aperture-priority auto, 39, 42
Autoexposure lock, 46, 77. See
also AE lock
Autofocus. See Focus
Auto image rotation (setup
menu), 88
Auto meter off, 14
(auto mode), 4, 15–17
Auto off timers (Custom Set-
tings menu), 78
Auto shooting info (setup
menu), 83
B
BASIC. See Image quality
Battery, 7, 9–10, 15, 103, 106–
107, 121. See also Clock, bat-
tery
EN-EL9, 7, 9–10, 103, 121
inserting, 9–10
life, 121
storage, 106–107
Beep (Custom Settings menu),
74
Black and white, 68, 92
Blur, reducing, 32, 41, 44. See
also Self timer; Shooting
mode, delayed remote;
Shooting mode, quick-
response remote
Brightness. See Exposure;
Flash, level; LCD brightness;
Monitor, brightness of
Built-in flash (Custom Set-
tings menu), 78
Bulb. See Long time-exposures
Burst. See Shooting mode,
continuous
C
Camera Control Pro, 56, 103
Capture NX, 31, 87, 103
Center-weighted. See Meter-
ing
Clock, 83, 111
battery, 83
Close up, 4, 19
Closest subject priority. See
Focus, AF-area mode
CLS. See Creative Lighting Sys-
tem
Color. See Color mode; Filter
effects; Hue; Saturation;
White balance
Color mode, 69
Color profile. See Color mode
Color space. See Color mode
Color temperature, 70, 118. See
also White balance
Computer, 55–56
Continuous. See Shooting
mode, continuous
Continuous-servo AF. See
Focus, autofocus, mode
Contrast, 68–69. See also Opti-
mize image; Tone compen-
sation
Copies. See Small picture
Creative Lighting System (CLS),
99–101
Crop, 59, 91. See also Printing,
cropping pictures for; Trim
CSM/Setup menu (setup
menu), 80–81
Custom Settings, 74–79
D
Date, 11, 83. See also Clock;
World time
Daylight saving time, 11, 83.
See also World time
DCF. See Design Rule for Cam-
era File System
Default settings, 38, 74, 113–
114. See also Reset; Two-but-
ton reset
Delete, 20, 54, 65. See also
Memory card, formatting; Pro-
tecting photographs
all images, 65
selected images, 65
single-frame playback, 20, 54
Delete (playback menu), 65
Depth of field, 39–40, 42
Design Rule for Camera File
System, 117
Digital Print Order Format, 57,
60–61, 117
Digital Vari-Program, 4, 18–19
Diopter, 14. See also Viewfinder
D-lighting, 90
D-lighting (retouch menu), 90
DPOF See Digital Print Order
Format
Dust off ref photo (setup
menu), 87
Dynamic area AF. See Focus,
AF-area mode
E
Electronic range finder. See
Focus, manual
Exif version 2.21, 117
Exposure, 39–44, 45–48,. See
also Aperture; Aperture-prior-
ity auto; Autoexposure lock;
Programmed auto; Shutter-
priority auto; Shutter speed;
Manual mode
compensation, 47
electronic analog exposure
display, 43
meters, 14, 78
program, 116
Eyepiece cap, 7, 33
F
File, 29–31, 51, 86, 116
format, 31, 117
File no. sequence (setup
menu), 86
Filter. See also Accessories,
optional; Filter effects
Neutral Density (ND), 102,
111
Filter effects (retouch menu),
92
Firmware. See Firmware ver-
sion
Firmware version (setup
menu), 86
FINE. See Image quality
Flash
built in, 2, 17, 34–36, 78
compensation, 48
level, 76
mode, 34–36
optional, 99–101
range, 117
ready indicator, 5, 17, 111–
112
remote, 99
Flexible program. See Pro-
grammed auto
(function) button, 2, 77,
115
Focus, 23–28
AF-area mode, 24, 75
area, 24, 25
center, 19, 25
autofocus, 23–27
lock, 26–27
manual, 28
mode, 23, 75
tracking, 119
Folder, 51, 66, 85
playback, 66
recording, 85
Folders (setup menu), 85
124 Index
Format memory card (setup
menu), 13, 81
H
Help, 3, 112
Highlights, 52
Histogram, 52, 92
Hue, 69
I
(setting) button, 3, 22
Illuminator. See AF-assist illu-
minator
Image comment (setup
menu), 84
Image overlay (retouch
menu), 94–95
Image quality, 29–31, 70
NEF (RAW), 30–31
Image quality (shooting
menu), 30, 70
Image sensor, 30, 86, 105, 106
dimensions of, 119
Image size, 29–31, 70
Image review (Custom Set-
tings menu), 75
Image size (shooting menu),
30, 70
(shooting information) but-
ton, 2, 22
Info display format (setup
menu), 81–82
ISO auto (Custom Settings
menu), 76
ISO sensitivity, 37, 73, 76
auto, 37, 76
ISO sensitivity (shooting
menu), 37, 73
i-TTL flash control, 78, 99–101
J
JPEG, 29–31, 57, 116
K
K. See Number of exposures
remaining
L
L. See Image size
Landscapes. See (land-
scape mode)
Language, 84, 121
Language (setup menu), 84
LCD brightness (setup
menu), 83
Lens, 1, 8, 97–98, 122
AF-S/AF-I, 1, 8, 97
non-CPU, 97–98
Lighting. See Flash; White bal-
ance
Long time-exposures, 44
Low-pass filter, 86, 105
cleaning, 105
M
M. See Image size
M. See Manual mode
Manual mode, 39, 43–44
Mass storage. See USB, Mass
storage
Matrix. See Metering
Memory buffer, 32, 116
Memory card, 12–13, 81, 102,
116
approved, 102
capacity, 116
formatting, 12–13, 81
lock, 13
(menu) button, 3, 63–64
Menus, 63–95. See also CSM/
Setup menu
using, 63–64
Metering, 45–46, 75
Mirror, 86, 104, 105
Mirror lock-up (setup menu),
86, 105
Mode, 4. See also Aperture-pri-
ority auto; Auto mode; Digital
Vari-Program; Programmed
auto; Manual mode; Shutter-
priority auto
Monitor, 3, 6, 50, 104
auto off, 14, 78
brightness of, 83
Monochrome, 68, 92. See also
Black and white
Monochrome (retouch
menu), 92
Moving subjects. See
(sports mode); Focus, autofo-
cus, mode
MTP/PTP. See USB, MTP/PTP
N
ND. See Filter, Neutral Density
(ND)
NEF (RAW). See Image quality,
NEF (RAW)
Neutral Density. See Filter,
Neutral Density (ND)
Night photography. See
(night portrait mode)
Noise, 37, 44, 73, 76. See also
Noise reduction
Noise reduction (shooting
menu), 73
No memory card? (Custom
Settings menu), 75
Non-CPU lens. See Lens, non-
CPU
NORMAL. See Image quality
Number of exposures remain-
ing, 5, 6, 15
O
Optimize image (shooting
menu), 68–69
Options. See Accessories,
optional
P
P. See Programmed auto
PictBridge, 57–61, 117
PictureProject, 31, 55–56, 57,
88, 103
Picture Transfer Protocol. See
USB, MTP/PTP
(flexible program indicator),
5, 40
Playback, 20, 50–54
full frame, 20, 50
menu, 65–67
thumbnail, 52
zoom, 53
Playback folder (playback
menu), 66
Portraits. See (portrait
mode); (night portrait
mode); Optimize image
PRE. See White balance, preset
Printing, 57–61. See also Pict-
Bridge; Print set (DPOF)
cropping pictures for, 59
Print set (DPOF) (playback
menu), 60–61, 67
Programmed auto, 39, 40
Protecting photographs, 54
Q
Quality. See Image quality
R
RAW. See Image quality, NEF
(RAW)
Rear curtain sync. See Flash,
mode
Red eye correction (retouch
menu), 91
Red-eye reduction. See Flash,
mode
Remote. See Accessories,
optional; Shooting mode,
delayed remote; Shooting
mode, quick-response remote
Remote control, 32–33, 103
Remote on duration (Cus-
tom Settings menu), 79
Reset. See Reset
Reset (Custom Settings
menu), 74
Retouch menu, 89–95
Rotate tall (playback menu),
66
Rotating photographs, 66, 88
S
S. See Image size
S. See Shutter-priority auto
(single-frame shooting
indicator), 32
Saturation, 68–69
SD. See Memory card
Secure Digital. See Memory
card
Self timer. See Shooting mode,
self timer
Self-timer (Custom Settings
menu), 79
Self-portraits. See Remote con-
trol; Self timer
Sensitivity. See ISO sensitivity
Sepia. See Monochrome
Setup menu, 80–88
Sharpening, 69
Shooting information display,
6, 22, 81–83
Shooting menu, 68–73
Shooting mode, 32–33, 75, 77
continuous, 32
delayed remote, 32–33
quick-response remote, 32–
33
self timer, 32–33, 77
single frame, 32
Shutter, 17, 41
speed, 6, 39–44. See also
Exposure
Shutter-priority auto, 39, 41
Single area AF. See Focus, AF-
area mode
Single frame. See Shooting
mode, single frame
Single-servo autofocus. See
Focus, autofocus, mode
Size. See Image size
Slide show. See Slide show
Slide show (playback menu),
67
Slow sync. See Flash mode
Small picture (retouch
menu), 92–93
Speedlight. See Flash
Spot. See Metering
sRGB. See Color mode
T
Television, 62, 103
Time, 11, 83. See also Clock;
World time
Time exposure. See Long time
exposures
Thumbnail. See Playback,
thumbnail
Trim (retouch menu), 91
Tone compensation, 69
Two-button reset, 38
Index 125
U
USB, 55–56, 57–58, 84
cable, 55–56, 57–58
Mass storage, 55, 84
MTP/PTP, 55, 84
USB (setup menu), 55, 84
V
Video cable, 62, 103
Video device, 62
Video mode (setup menu),
62, 83
VIDEO OUT, 2, 62
Viewfinder, 5, 14, 16, 102, 111–
112
accessories, 102
focus, 14
indicators, 5, 111–112
Viewing photographs. See
Playback
W
(white balance indicator), 6,
49, 70–72
White balance, 49, 70–72. See
also Color temperature
preset, 49, 70–72
White balance (shooting
menu), 49, 70–72
World time (setup menu), 11,
83
126
PrihIed ih 8elgium
S87C02(11)
6M8A8911-02
No reproducIioh ih ahy !orm o! Ihis mahual, ih whole or ih parI (excepI !or
brie! quoIaIioh ih criIical arIicles or reviews), may be made wiIhouI wriIIeh
auIhorizaIioh !rom NIKON CORPORA1ION.

Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:

The Table of Contents
Find items by function or menu name.

See pages v–vi

The Q&A Index

See pages vii–ix

Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from the “question and answer” index.

The Index
Search by key word.

See pages 123–125

Error Messages

See pages 111–112

If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution here.

Troubleshooting

See pages 108–110

Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.

Help Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 3 for details. Digitutor Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html

Introduction Tutorial Photography and Playback More on Photography (All Modes) P, S, A, and M Modes Reference More on Playback Connecting to a Computer, Printer, or TV Playback Options: The Playback Menu Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu Menu Guide Custom Settings Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu Technical Notes

i

• Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas. • Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery. • Do not short or disassemble the battery. • Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery. remove the battery and/or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon-authorized service center for inspection. Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation. as this could result in explosion or fire. or forcibly tug or bend the power cable. take the power cable to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection. Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident. read all warnings before using this Nikon product. care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally. Continued operation could result in injury. Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame. • Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands. • Do not immerse in or expose to water. The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol: This icon marks warnings. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them. be sure it is unplugged. WARNINGS Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment. • Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged.For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others. • Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth. such as discoloration or deformation. attach the terminal cover and store in a cool. Continued use could result in fire. read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. • The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period. • Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. • When the battery is not in use. • Do not damage. In the event of malfunction. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. After removing the battery. Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger • Keep dry. Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder. Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool. If you are using an AC adapter. • Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery. take the equipment to a Nikon-authorized service center for inspection. be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains. taking care to avoid burns. ii For Your Safety . Do not disassemble Touching the product’s internal parts could result in injury. To prevent possible injury. Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately. • Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product: • Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. modify. Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins. the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician. Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury. dry place. Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter (available separately). To avoid damage to the product.

Playing CDROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment.A. However.: 631-547-4200 ATTENTION Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 1300 Walt Whitman Road. transmitted.you to lead. we • Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omishardware and software described in these manuals at any sions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your time and without prior notice. WARNING: Handling the cord on this product may expose • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television tech. Using other interface cables may exceed the • Increase the separation between the equipment and limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device. Observe caution when using the flash Do not operate the flash with the flash window touching a person or object. which can be deter. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different Notice for Customers in the State of California from that to which the receiver is connected. a chemical known to the State of California to nician for help. area (address provided separately).CAUTIONS ference to radio communications. U. Notices for Customers in the U. Notices • No part of the manuals included with this product may be • Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting reproduced. CD-ROMs CD-ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment. Using the flash close to the subject’s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. and can radiate radio frequency energy and. uses. transcribed. use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations. if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions. Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Wash hands after handling.A.approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authormined by turning the equipment off and on. there is no Modifications guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or installation. by any • While every effort has been made to ensure that the informeans.S. encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or Interface Cables more of the following measures: Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants. system. New York 11747-3064.S. Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire. when the flash should be no less than one meter (39in. cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer. care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth. Melville. Notices iii .modifications made to this device that are not expressly ence to radio or television reception. stored in a retrieval from the use of this product..) from the subject. Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break. or translated into any language in any form. mation in these manuals is accurate and complete. D40x Nikon Inc. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Tel. pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. This equipment generates. the user is ity to operate the equipment. equipment. may cause harmful inter. without Nikon’s prior written permission. receiver.Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks.

Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. ID cards. movies. Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Do not dispose of as household waste. licenses issued by public agencies and priUnless the prior permission of the government has been vate groups. or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example. and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. music. Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset white balance and for Info display format>Wallpaper.” bills. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility. or coupon tickets. prints. Inc. drawings. Mac OS. Do not use this prohibited. or other device may be punishable by law. or copies are to be provided for business use by a company. or local government bonds. securities. even if ductions of securities issued by private companies (shares. securities which are circulated in a foreign country is proAlso. etc. the copying or reproduction or unused postage coupons. • Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions Do not copy or reproduce paper money. The SDHC logo is a trademark. paintings. Acrobat. potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. • For more information. coins. government. Trademark Information Macintosh. do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the hibited. gift certificates. contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software. and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws.). Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person. The following apply only to users in European countries: • This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation. PictBridge is a trademark. Adobe. except when a minimum of necessary The copying or reproduction of paper money. commuter passes. and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Computer. The government has issued cautions on copies or reprogovernment bonds. ernment and of certified documents stipulated by law is maps. such as passes and meal obtained. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD Card Association. Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner.works such as books. erase all data using commercial deletion software. coins. iv Notices . stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohib• Comply with copyright notices ited. and tickets. The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the gov. product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws. digital camera. pictures of empty sky). such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample. woodcuts. checks.Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.

...................................................................................................... 76 9: AF-assist (All Modes Except and ).............................................................................................55 Before Connecting the Camera................................ iii Q&A Index ............................................................................. 80 Format Memory Card..........................................11 Inserting Memory Cards...................................... 81 Auto Shooting Info..................................... 84 USB ....................20 Reference ...........................................................................................54 Deleting Individual Photographs............................... 84 Table of Contents v . 57 Viewing Photographs on TV........................................................... 76 10: ISO Auto (P......................................................................................................34 ISO Sensitivity .......74 R: Reset............................................ 75 4: Shooting Mode.. 74 2: Focus Mode ............................................................................. and M Modes..................................................................................................... 83 World Time ..................................50 Viewing Photographs on the Camera..................................................................................................................................................................................... 77 12: AE-L/AF-L ..25 Focus Lock.................................................... S....................................................................................................................................30 Image Size ............................................................... A... 75 5: Metering (P......22 The Shooting Information Display .................................................................... 67 Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu ................................ 68 Image Quality ............................................................24 Focus Area Selection........................................45 Autoexposure Lock........15 Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs)................22 Focus ...........................28 Image Quality and Size........ 66 Rotate Tall...............................................................................................29 Image Quality............................................................................................................................. Printer...........................1 Getting to Know the Camera .............................................................................................................................................................................. and M Modes Only)................................................................................................. 83 LCD Brightness.....................................48 White Balance .68 Optimize Image (P............................................................................. 8 Attaching a Lens..................... 63 Using Camera Menus ......................................................... 70 White Balance (P...........................................................................................21 More on Photography (All Modes) ....................... 79 Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu ................... 8 Charging and Inserting the Battery.................................................................................................. 9 Basic Setup.................................................... 74 1: Beep.....18 Basic Playback................51 Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ........................................... 67 Print Set (DPOF) ...23 AF-Area Mode ............................................................................................................ 78 16: Self-Timer.................................57 Printing Via Direct USB Connection................................................................62 Menu Guide...................................................... A............................... and M Modes Only)...... and M Modes) ................................................................ A.....70 ISO Sensitivity.....................49 More on Playback ................................................................................................... S........................ or TV ...................................................... 83 Video Mode.................................... 55 Printing Photographs...................................................................................65 Playback Folder................................................................................................................. 77 13: AE Lock........................50 Photo Information........ and M Modes Only) .................................................................... and M Modes Only)........................................................................................................... 77 14: Built-in Flash (P................ A...... 79 17: Remote on Duration.. 75 3: AF-Area Mode............................39 Mode P (Programmed Auto) ............................................................................................ A.......14 Tutorial ...............................................................................................................78 15: Auto off Timers.. 73 Noise Reduction............... 55 Connecting the USB Cable......................41 Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) .....................47 Flash Compensation ..80 CSM/Setup menu..........................................54 Connecting to a Computer.........................................................................................................15 “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode)....................................................ii Notices.......46 Exposure Compensation.......................65 Delete.......................................................53 Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............. and M Modes) ............................................ A..63 Playback Options: The Playback Menu......................................................Table of Contents For Your Safety.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... S.............................................33 Using the Built-in Flash......................................55 Connecting to a Computer ....... vii Introduction . 75 8: Flash Compensation (P.......................................................................................................................... 84 Image Comment ...........26 Manual Focus .................................................................43 Exposure ................. 70 Image Size................................................................................................................................. 73 Custom Settings........................... 81 Info Display Format ....................................................................23 Focus Mode............42 Mode M (Manual) ..................................32 Self-Timer and Remote Control Modes..........................................40 Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) ...................................................................................37 Two-Button Reset........ 83 Language..........................45 Metering.............................................. 66 Slide Show ... 76 11: /Fn Button.................................................... 75 6: No Memory Card?........................38 P.............................................................. 75 7: Image Review ....... 2 First Steps .... S........12 Adjusting Viewfinder Focus..................................................................................................... A.............. S............................................................................................................. S...................52 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ..............................30 Shooting Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................ S..............................................

Folders....................................................................................................85 File No. Sequence ...........................................................................86 Mirror Lock-Up..................................................................................86 Firmware Version.............................................................................86 Dust off Ref Photo...........................................................................87 Auto Image Rotation ....................................................................88 Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu.........89 D-Lighting ...........................................................................................90 Red-Eye Correction ........................................................................91 Trim..........................................................................................................91 Monochrome.....................................................................................92 Filter Effects.........................................................................................92 Small Picture.......................................................................................92 Image Overlay...................................................................................94

Technical Notes ............................................... 96 Optional Accessories.........................................................96 Lenses .................................................................................................... 97 Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ...................................... 99 Other Accessories........................................................................ 102 Accessories for the D40x......................................................... 103 Caring for the Camera.................................................... 104 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ............ 106 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 108 Camera Error Messages and Displays ............................. 111 Appendix ............................................................................ 113 Specifications.................................................................... 119 Index ............................................................. 123

vi

Table of Contents

Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index. General Questions
Question How do I use the menus? How do I get more information on a menu? What do these indicators mean? What does this warning mean? How many more shots can I take with this card? How much charge does the battery have left? What does “exposure” mean and how does it work? What do I do with the viewfinder eyepiece cap? What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use? What lenses can I use? What accessories are available for my camera? What memory cards can I use? What software is available for my camera? Who can I ask to repair or inspect my camera? How do I clean the camera or lens? Key phrase Using the menus Help Page # 63–64 3 5–6, Monitor, viewfinder 81–82 Error messages and displays 111–112 Number of exposures remaining 29, 116 Battery level 15 Exposure 39 Self timer, remote control 7, 33 Optional flash units 99 Lenses 97 Accessories for the D40x 96 Approved memory cards 102 Accessories for the D40x 103 Servicing the camera x Cleaning the camera 104

Camera Setup
Question How do I focus the viewfinder? How do I keep the monitor from turning off? How do I keep the shutter speed and aperture displays from turning off? How do I set the clock? How do I set the clock for daylight savings time? How do I change time zones when I travel? How do I adjust monitor brightness? How do I restore default settings? How do I turn off the light on the front of the camera? How do I change the self timer delay? How do I change the remote delay? How do I keep the camera from beeping? How do I view all the items in the menus? Can I display the menus in a different language? How do I keep the file number from being reset when I insert a new memory card? How can I prevent the same file name from being assigned to different photographs? Key phrase Viewfinder focus Stand-by mode Page # 14 78

World time LCD brightness Two-button reset AF-assist illuminator Self timer Remote control Beep CSM/setup menu Language File number sequence

11, 83 83 38 76 33 33 74 80 84 86

Q&A Index

vii

Taking Photographs
Question Is there an easy way to take snapshots? Is there an easy way to take more creative shots? What do I do if flash photography is prohibited? How do I bring out a portrait subject? How can I get good landscape shots? How do I take snapshots of my kids? How do I “freeze” a moving subject? How do I take close ups of small objects? Can I include night backgrounds in my portraits? How do I change camera settings using the shooting information display? How do I take a lot of photographs quickly? Can I shoot a self-portrait? Is there a remote control for this camera? How do I adjust exposure? How do I freeze or blur moving objects? How do I blur background details? Can I make photos brighter or darker? How do I make a time exposure? How do I use the flash? Can the flash fire automatically when needed? How do I keep the flash from firing? How do I prevent red eye? Can I take pictures under low light without the flash? Can I control how the camera focuses? How do I focus on a moving subject? How do I choose where the camera focuses? Can I change the composition after focusing? How do I improve image quality? How do I take bigger photographs? How can I get more photos on the memory card? Can I take photos at a reduced size for e-mail? Key phrase Auto mode Digital Vari-Program modes Auto (flash off ) mode Portrait mode Landscape mode Child mode Sports mode Close-up mode Night portrait mode Shooting information display Shooting mode Exposure; P, S, A, and M modes Mode S (shutter-priority auto) Mode A (aperture-priority auto) Exposure compensation Long time-exposures Flash photography, flash mode Red-eye reduction ISO sensitivity Autofocus Focus mode Focus area Focus lock Image quality and size Page # 15 18

19

22 32 33 33 39 41 42 47 44 34 35 37 23 23 25 26 29–30

viii Q&A Index

Viewing. 61 61 90 91 91 92 92 92 94 Q&A Index ix . highlights Deleting individual photos Delete Playback zoom Protect Slide show Television playback Connecting to a computer Printing photographs Printing via USB Time stamp. and Retouching Photographs Question Can I view my photographs on the camera? Can I view more information about photos? Why parts of my photos blink? How do I get rid of an unwanted photo? Can I delete several photos at once? Can I zoom in on pictures to make sure they’re in focus? Can I protect photos from accidental deletion? Is there an automatic playback (“slide show”) option? Can I view my photos on TV? How do I copy photos to my computer? How do I print photographs? Can I print photos without a computer? Can I print the date on my photographs? How do I order professional prints? How do I bring out details in shadows? Can I get rid of red eye? Can I crop photographs on the camera? Can I create a monochrome copy of a photograph? Can I create a copy with different colors? Can I make a small copy of a photograph? Can I overlay two photos to make a single image? Key phrase Camera playback Photo info Photo info. Printing. DPOF Print set D-lighting Red-eye correction Trim Monochrome Filter effects Small picture Image overlay Page # 50 51 52 54 65 53 54 67 62 55 57 57 59.

S. and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Oceania.A. tips.Life-Long Learning As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education.com/support • For users in Asia.europe-nikon.nikon-asia. continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites: • For users in the U. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area.com/ Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information.nikonusa.: http://www.com/ x . answers to frequentlyasked questions (FAQs).com/ • For users in Europe and Africa: http://www. See the following URL for contact information: http://nikonimaging. and the Middle East: http://www.

5–5. This icon indicates that more information is available elsewhere in this manual or in the Quick Start Guide. An 18–55 mm f/3. This icon marks tips. A-M mode switch: 8. This icon marks notes. the following symbols and conventions are used: This icon marks cautions. This manual has been written to help you enjoy taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom Nikkor lens ( 122) is used in this manual for illustrative purposes. 28 9. Read this manual thoroughly before use. Mounting index: 8 6. Focal length scale index 5. CPU contacts: 45 8. This icon marks settings that can be finetuned from the Custom Settings menu. This icon marks settings that can be adjusted using camera menus. and keep it handy when using the product. information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera. To make it easier to find the information you need. Focal length scale 4. Lens Autofocus is supported with AF-S and AF-I lenses only. · » ¾ º ¶ ² ´ ¿ 1. Rear cover: 8 7. additional information that may be helpful when using the camera. information that should be read before using the camera.Introduction Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D40x single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera with interchangeable lenses. Zoom ring 2. Lens cap Introduction 1 . Focus ring: 28 3.

...........................................................................................17 4 (exposure compensation) button.....................................4 9 Built-in flash......................................................................................................... 58..................................................................................... You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual...............28 8 Mode dial...........................................................................38 6 AF-assist illuminator................35 7 (focal plane mark)............ 77 19 Lens release button ............................................47 (aperture) button....................34 10 Accessory shoe cover..................................................23 Self-timer lamp........................................................ 7 14 Connector cover...48 5 (shooting information) button .............22 (reset) button.......55............................................4 3 Shutter-release button.....................................................................................................................108 17 USB connector.................................43 Flash compensation......................................................................................................Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays..............33 Red-eye reduction lamp ...... 8 20 Lens mounting index ........ 62 16 Reset switch ... 62 15 Video connector........... 34 (flash compensation) button ............................ Camera Body µ º ¾ ¸ ¹ 1 Infrared receiver........................ 8 2 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera ........................................................................................................................................................... 99 12 (flash mode) button..................................................................................... 33 (function) button .55......................33 2 Power switch ........... 99 11 Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit).............. 48 13 Eyelet for camera strap...................... 58 18 (self-timer) button ..................................

.6...................................................10. A blinking icon indicates that help on an error or other problem can be viewed in the monitor by pressing the button..................................................... 10 Battery-chamber cover ................................................................................................................20.......................................14 4 (AE-L/AF-L) button... press the multi selector up or down........... Help is displayed in the monitor while the button is pressed.. 82 (playback zoom) button........................................ View next photo Display sub-menu Retouch photo ( 89) Make selection Playback ( 51) Menus/shooting info ( 22.......................... 38 (thumbnail) button..... 63) Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 3 ................................... press the button...................... 63 (playback) button ....................... 77 18 (protect) button.................................103 Battery-chamber cover latch...........................115 Eyelet for camera strap.......7 2 Viewfinder eyepiece . 52 (help) button (menu) button........................................54 19 5 Command dial......... 54 Memory card access lamp ...................................... 14 17 3 Diopter adjustment control .........5............... to scroll the display......................................... View more photo info Move cursor up Press up View previous photo Return to previous menu Cancel Press right Press left Press down View more photo info Move cursor down Help For help on the current mode or menu item........ 53 (setting) button ..... 12 Power connector cover for optional AC adapter connector ............20............... 22 (reset) button .......................... 103 Tripod socket Monitor....................................... 7 Multi selector * Memory card slot cover............................................. 50 * Multi selector The multi selector is used for menu navigation and playback......46.................... 12 (delete) button.......................6 7 8 9 10 11 µ ¸ ¹ 12 13 14 15 16 1 DK-16 viewfinder eyepiece cup.................................. 50....................................................................................

The Mode Dial The D40x offers a choice of the following twelve shooting modes: Advanced Modes (Exposure Modes) Select these modes for full control over camera settings. On Off 4 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera . making creative photography as simple as rotating the mode dial. P—Programmed auto: 40 S—Shutter-priority auto: 41 A—Aperture-priority auto: M—Manual: 43 42 Point-and-Shoot Modes (Digital Vari-Programs) Selecting a Digital Vari-Program automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene. —Auto: 15 —Auto (flash off): 18 —Portrait: 18 —Landscape: 18 — Child: 19 —Sports: 19 — Close up: 19 —Night portrait: 19 The Power Switch The power switch is used to turn the camera on and off.

................14............ Large-Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings....... 32.......................... 24 Preset white balance recording indicator .... 111 The Viewfinder The response time and brightness of the viewfinder may vary with temperature...... 24.56 Dust off ref photo mode indicator......... 40 Flash compensation value . Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 5 ....39–44 11 Flash-ready indicator .................................... 16....................37....................... 116 3 Focus area display..... 78.....71 4 Autoexposure (AE) lock .............. 26 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills..................3................... rounded down to the nearest hundred (e........ 25....................160 exposures............ 16........... 46 Exposure compensation value....................................................................43 Exposure compensation ...... 47 13 Electronic analog exposure display.... 16...... the exposure count display will show 1...48... 26 AF-area mode..47 5 Flexible program indicator ............... 25...17 8 Flash compensation indicator.......................................48 6 Shutter speed ...The Viewfinder Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Focus brackets (focus areas)..14.... 76 15 “K” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures) 16 Warning indicator.......................................................................................1K)........................................................................................... This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction............ 24............15 9 Exposure compensation indicator .......................................... 116 2 Focus indicator .........g...................47 14 ISO AUTO indicator...................39–44 PC connection indicator .......... the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands....87 7 Aperture (f/-number)......................................... 26 10 Number of exposures remaining...... 101 12 Battery indicator.............................. 15..................................... if there is room for approximately 1............

.................. 78 Flash compensation indicator for optional Speedlight......................................................................................................................35 10 Exposure compensation value........... 24 Focus mode..................47 4 Aperture (f/-number) ........................... Fast shutter speed........................ 30 Image quality............................... 25 1 5 20 19 2 4 7 8 3 9 10 13 12 6 18 17 16 15 14 24 23 22 21 11 1 Focus area display .................................. The Shutter-Speed and Aperture Displays These displays provide a visual indication of shutter speed and aperture......................... 49 Image size..................................................................... 16....3 12 Number of exposures remaining................................. 30 Battery indicator ................. 68 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator............................................................................................. 15...... 26 AF-area mode ....................................................... press the button. 45 AF-area mode.. small aperture (large f/-number) 6 Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera ................................................................... 74 Optimize image indicator................................... 39–44 3 Electronic analog exposure display .................................................................101 Note: Above display is shown when Graphic is selected for Info display format................................................................. 15 “Beep” indicator.................. 23 Shooting mode..........................47 11 Help indicator ..........................................................56 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Metering mode ................................................24 2 Shutter speed... large aperture (small f/-number) Slow shutter speed........ See page 22 for information on changing camera settings................................ 76 Manual flash control indicator....................................................... 32 ISO sensitivity.....................................The Shooting Information Display To view camera settings........................ 14............ 116 Preset white balance recording indicator ................................................... See page 81 for other display formats............4 6 Shutter-speed display 7 Aperture display 8 Flash compensation value...........37. 39–44 5 Mode ............................. 37 White balance mode .. 25........................................................... The following shooting information will be displayed in the monitor.....................................71 PC mode indicator............48 9 Flash sync mode... 24.........................................................43 Exposure compensation .....

remove the DK-16 viewfinder eyepiece cup. Before attaching the DK-5 or other viewfinder accessories ( 102). 121) Negative terminal Signal contact Positive terminal Terminal cover The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown above could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating. CHARGE lamp AC adapter plug AC inlet Wall plug (shape varies with country of sale) The EN-EL9 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery ( The EN-EL9 is for use with the D40x. 103. Introduction: Getting to Know the Camera 7 . The Camera Strap Attach the camera strap as shown below. rupturing. igniting. Hold the camera firmly when removing the cup. or leaking.Supplied Accessories The DK-5 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cap Attach the DK-5 viewfinder eyepiece cap for self-timer ( 33) or remote control photography ( 33). The MH-23 Quick Charger ( 122) The MH-23 is for use with the supplied EN-EL9 battery.

press and hold the lens-release button while turning the lens clockwise. Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when exchanging lenses. lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f/-number). After removing the lens. select A (autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with manual priority). 8 Introduction: First Steps . Aperture Ring If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring. Remove the rear lens cap from the lens. replace the camera body cap and rear lens cover. 2 Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the mounting index on the camera body. Detaching Lenses Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. 1 Turn the camera off and remove the body cap. See the lens manual for details. If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch. To remove the lens.First Steps Attaching a Lens Autofocus is supported with AF-S and AF-I lenses only. position the lens in the camera’s bayonet mount and rotate the lens in the direction shown until it clicks into place.

3 Place the battery in the charger.Charging and Inserting the Battery The supplied EN-EL9 battery is not charged at shipment. the temperature should be in the vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F). Charge the battery using the supplied MH-23 battery charger as described below. Introduction: First Steps 9 .1 Remove the terminal cover from the battery. Battery capacity may drop if the battery is charged or used at lower temperatures. For best results. charge the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). together with any warnings and instructions provided by the battery manufacturer. The CHARGE lamp will blink as the battery charges. Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F).4 Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking. During charging. 1. 1. Remove the battery from the charger and unplug the charger. The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages ii–iii and 106–107 of this manual. 1. 1.2 Connect the power cord to the charger and plug it in. About 90 minutes are required for an exhausted battery to fully charge. 1 Charge the battery.

Removing the Battery Turn the camera off before removing the battery. To avoid shorting the battery. Close the battery chamber cover.2 Insert a fully charged battery as shown at right.2 Insert the battery. replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use.1 After confirming that the power switch is in the off position. 10 Introduction: First Steps . 2. 2. open the battery chamber cover.

See the Menu Guide ( 63) for information on normal menu operation. Follow the steps below to choose a language and set the time and date. To reset the camera clock. 1 Turn camera on.Basic Setup The first time the camera is turned on. use the World time option in the setup menu ( 83). in hours. 9 Using Camera Menus The language menu is only displayed automatically the first time the camera is turned on. No photographs can be taken until the camera clock has been set. 8 Press multi selector left or right to select item. Introduction: First Steps 11 . up or down to change. the language selection dialog shown in Step 1 will be displayed in the monitor. 6 Highlight On if daylight saving time is in effect. choose a new time zone. 7 Display date menu. 3 4 Display map of world time zones. 2 Select language. turn daylight saving time on or off. month. or choose the order in which the year.* Select local time zone. Exit to shooting mode. 5 Display daylight saving time options. * UTC field shows time difference between selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). and date are displayed.

1 Insert a memory card.2 Slide the memory card in as shown at right until it clicks into place. Confirm that the access lamp is off. 1. 2. 1.1 Before inserting or removing memory cards. Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. 3. The card can then be removed by hand ( ). Press the card in to eject ( ). See “Approved Memory Cards” for information on approved memory cards ( 102). Close the memory card slot cover. Front Removing Memory Cards 1.Inserting Memory Cards The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately). turn the camera off and open the card slot cover. The memory card access lamp will light for about a second. 12 Introduction: First Steps .

Position cursor in setup menu.2 Memory cards must be formatted in the camera before first use. Format card. 2.8 Highlight Yes.7 2. Formatting Memory Cards Use the camera Format memory card option to format memory cards.3 2.4 Highlight . 2. press multi selector left to highlight icon for current menu. 2. Note that formatting memory cards permanently deletes all photographs and other data they may contain. The Write Protect Switch SD cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental loss of data. Performance may drop if cards are formatted in a computer.1 2. When this switch is in the “lock” position. the camera will display a message to warn that photos can not be recorded or deleted and the memory card can not be formatted. Write-protect switch Introduction: First Steps 13 .* * If menu item is highlighted. Display menus. Display options.5 2.2 Turn camera on. Do not turn camera off or remove card or battery until formatting is complete and setup menu is displayed. 2. Be sure all data you wish to keep have been copied to another storage device before formatting the card.6 Highlight Format memory card.

be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye. Focus brackets Auto Meter Off At default settings. the viewfinder and shooting information display will turn off if no operations are performed for about eight seconds (auto meter off ). When operating the diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder. 78). The viewfinder can be focused by removing the lens cap and sliding the diopter adjustment control up and down until the focus brackets are in sharp focus.Adjusting Viewfinder Focus Photographs are framed in the viewfinder. reducing the drain on the battery. Before shooting. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder ( 17). 14 Introduction: First Steps . make sure that the display in the viewfinder is in clear focus. 8s Exposure meters on Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting 15 (Auto off timers.

Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) 15 . the display will flash as shown at right. If there is not enough memory to store additional photographs at current settings. press the button to display shooting information. button is pressed. 2 Rotate the mode dial to (auto mode). Shutter release disabled. 1. Check the number of exposures remaining. Low battery. the battery 1. Check the battery level as described below. Monitor Viewfinder Description — Battery fully charged. Charge the battery. 1. an automatic “pointand-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions. Charge battery. No further pictures can be taken until the memory card has been replaced or photographs have been deleted ( 20.1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.Tutorial Photography and Playback “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) This section describes how to take photographs in (auto) mode.3 The number of photographs that can be stored on the memory card is shown in the shooting information display and viewfinder. 1 Turn the camera on. — Battery partially discharged. The monitor will turn on and the viewfinder display will light. (blinks) (blinks) If shooting information is not displayed when the is exhausted. 65). Prepare to charge battery.2 If the monitor is off.

and the infocus indicator ( ) will appear in the viewfinder. The number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer (“r”. The monitor will turn off. 32) is shown in the viewfinder display while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths to zoom in. Focus area Zoom in Zoom out 4 Focus and shoot.1 Hold the camera as shown. 4. a beep will sound. the selected focus area will be highlighted. If the subject is dark. 3. Using a Zoom Lens Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger area of the frame. 16 Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) . Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable. Holding the Camera Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left. the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation and the flash may pop up.1 Press the shutter-release button halfway. The camera will automatically select the focus area containing the subject closest to the camera and focus on this subject.3 Frame a photograph in the viewfinder.2 Frame a photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in any of the three focus areas. shorter focal lengths to zoom out). 3. When the focus operation is complete.

Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity ( 117). 5 Turn the camera off when shooting is complete. remove lens hoods when using the flash. For more information on using the flash. the built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (to prevent the flash from firing when lighting is poor. press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.4. To take the photograph. The Shutter-Release Button The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. Take photograph Tutorial: “Point-and-Shoot” Photography ( Mode) 17 . If the flash is required. If the subject is stationary (or if single-servo autofocus is selected in P.2 Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to release the shutter and record the photograph. return it to its closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place. Focus The Built-in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in mode. A. select Auto (flash off ) mode). a beep will sound and focus will lock. see page 34. photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator ( ) is displayed. Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete. S. or M mode. remove your finger briefly from the shutterrelease button and try again. If a photograph can not be taken and the flash-ready indicator is not displayed. The access lamp next to the memory card slot cover will light. To save battery power when the flash is not in use. The camera focuses and the monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. 23).

the D40x offers a choice of seven Digital Vari-Program modes. Landscape Use for vivid landscape shots. The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject. For portraits taken under low light. natural-looking skin tones. background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth. and other small objects. Mode Auto (flash off) Portrait Landscape Child Sports Close up Night portrait Description For pictures that do not use the flash. For moving subjects. 18 Tutorial: Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs) . The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject.Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs) In addition to . focus. Digital Vari-Program modes are described below. For natural and man-made landscapes. or to capture natural lighting under low light. the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor. To take photographs in Digital Vari-Program modes: 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to select a Digital Vari-Program mode. If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used. and shoot. Use where flash photography is prohibited. The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject. Frame a photograph in the viewfinder. For pictures of children. Portrait Use for portraits with soft. to photograph infants without using the flash. Auto (Flash Off) The built-in flash turns off. For portraits. insects. the built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically. Selecting a program automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene. making creative photography as easy as rotating the mode dial. For close up shots of flowers.

the built-in flash will pop automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. . Tutorial: Creative Photography (Digital Vari-Programs) 19 . The starting focus area can be selected with the multi selector. insects. The Built-in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in . and other small objects. tracking the subject in the center focus area. Night Portrait Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur. or mode. If the subject leaves the center focus area. See “Using the Built-in Flash” for information on choosing a flash mode ( 34). natural finish. Close Up Use for close-up shots of flowers. The camera automatically focuses on the subject in the center focus area. Clothing and background details are vividly rendered while skin tones are given a soft. The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject. the camera will continue to focus based on information from the other focus areas. The camera selects the focus area containing the closest subject. Sports High shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly. other focus areas can be selected using the multi selector. .Child Use for snapshots of children.

If no photograph is displayed in the monitor. Additional pictures can be displayed by rotating the command dial or pressing the multi selector left or right. press the shutterrelease button halfway. Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor. To exit without deleting the picture.Basic Playback Photographs are automatically displayed after shooting. press the button. 20 Tutorial: Basic Playback . press the button. The battery level and number of exposures remaining are also displayed. the most recent picture can be viewed by pressing the button ( 50). To end playback and return to shooting mode. Press the button again to delete the image and return to playback. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

68. lock exposure. or using the self-timer or a remote control Use the built-in flash Raise ISO sensitivity when lighting is poor Restore default settings 22 The Shooting Information Display: Focus: Image Quality and Size: Shooting Mode: Using the Built-in Flash: ISO Sensitivity: Two-Button Reset: 22 23 29 32 34 37 38 P. A. 69). More on Playback: 50 Viewing Photographs on the Camera: 65–67). including customizing sharpening. color saturation. and M modes. or TV: Copy photographs to a computer Print photographs View photographs on TV 55 Connecting to a Computer: Printing Photographs: Viewing Photographs on TV: 55 57 62 Reference 21 . contrast. and hue (“Optimize Image”. S. More on Photography (All Modes): Use the shooting information display Shoot a moving subject or focus manually Adjust image quality and size Take photographs in one at a time. A. in bursts. Printer.Reference This section builds on the Tutorial to cover more advanced shooting and playback options. adjust exposure and flash level Make colors look natural Take photos under unusual lighting See the Menu Guide for information on other operations that can only be performed in P. and M Modes: 39 Mode P (Programmed Auto): Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto): Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto): Mode M (Manual): Exposure: White Balance: 40 41 42 43 45 49 Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture Freeze or blur motion Choose whether to blur background objects Choose shutter speed and aperture manually Choose how the camera meters exposure. 50 View photographs on the camera See the Menu Guide for other playback options ( Connecting to a Computer. S.

* Press to return to Step 3 without modifying setting. 3 4 5 Highlight desired option. or by pressing when the flash is enabled. The button can be used to change the settings shown in the shooting information display. by pressing / (unless white balance is selected for Custom Setting 11 in Digital Vari-Program mode. Settings not available in current mode are grayed out and can not be selected. Monitor turns off while shutterrelease button is pressed. Repeat Steps 3–6 to change other settings.More on Photography (All Modes) The Shooting Information Display Pressing the button displays shooting information in the monitor. 1 Display shooting information. or press to return to Step 1. The display format depends on the option selected for Info display format in the setup menu ( 81). 6 Select option. Highlight desired setting. 2 Selected setting is highlighted. 77). * Display options for highlighted setting. Shooting information is also displayed after the shutterrelease button is released when On is selected for Auto shooting info ( 83) and immediately after the camera is turned on. Shooting information can also be displayed by pressing in shooting mode. 22 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/The Shooting Information Display . or A mode. by pressing in P. To hide shooting information. S. press the button again. 7 Take pictures.

). AF-S and AF-C are available only in P. 10in.” below) or manually ( 28). S. Priority is given to shutter response. 25) or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing ( 26).5–3. continuous-servo autofocus when subject is judged to be (default setting) moving.–9ft. Focus Mode Controls used Choose how the camera focuses. Focus mode The AF-Assist Illuminator If the subject is poorly lit. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed AF-S Single-servo AF halfway. For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release butContinuouston is pressed halfway. For stationary subjects. or if the center focus area is not selected or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting 9 (AF assist). meaning that AF-C servo AF shutter may sometimes be released before in-focus indicator ( ) is displayed in viewfinder. Description Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus when subject is judged Auto-servo AF AF-A to be stationary. The illuminator has a range of about 0. A. in . The AF-assist illuminator will not light in continuousservo AF or manual focus mode.Focus Focus can be adjusted automatically (see “Focus Mode. 8in. MF Manual focus User focuses manually ( 28). 2—Focus Mode ( 75) Focus mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu. Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 23 .0m (1ft. when using the illuminator. use a lens with a focal length of 24– 200mm and remove the lens hood. the AF-assist illuminator will light automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. and M modes. or modes. The user can also select the focus area for automatic or manual focus ( 24.

and M modes. subject . Selected automatically when mode dial is area rotated to . selected automatically when mode dial is rotated to . Option Description Camera automatically selects focus area containing subject closest to camera. Selected automatically when mode dial is rotated to . . or . but if subject leaves selected focus area even briefly. Use with erratically movarea ing subjects. A. 24 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus . Dynamic camera will focus based on information from other focus areas. S. User selects focus area manually. camera focuses on subject in selected focus Single area only. .AF-Area Mode Controls used Choose how the focus area is selected in autofocus mode. User selects focus area using multi selector. . Viewfinder Display AF-area mode is shown in the viewfinder as follows: Closest subject Dynamic area Single area 3—AF-Area Mode ( 75) AF-area mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu. Use with stationary subjects. This setting has no effect in manual focus mode. Default Closest for P.

Focus Area Selection Controls used Multi selector The D40x offers a choice of three focus areas. . A. S. the focus area is selected automatically in . Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 25 . . Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the focus area in the viewfinder or shooting information display. and M modes. select Single area or Dynamic area for AF-area mode in the shooting information display ( 24). To enable manual focus selection in these modes. 1 2 At default settings. P. but the focus area can also be selected manually to compose photographs with the main subject positioned at either side of the frame. The selected focus area is highlighted again when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings. . the camera chooses the focus area automatically or focuses on subject in the center focus area. . .

continuous shooting mode ( 32). or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in auto-servo AF ( 23). Focus will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. or continuous-servo autofocus ( 23). Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.Focus Lock Controls used Shutter-release button/AE-L/AF-L button Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing. It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus ( 27). Single or dynamic area AF is recommended when using focus lock ( 24). even if you later remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Check that the in-focus indicator ( ) appears in the viewfinder. Recompose the photograph and shoot. 3 The shutter-release button can not be used to lock focus in mode ( 19). focus will remain locked between shots if the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway. and remain locked while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. 1 2 Focus lock can be used with any focus area. 12—AE-L/AF-L ( 77) This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button. Use the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus. Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator appears. making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus area in the final composition. 26 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus . At other settings. Position the subject in the selected focus area ( 25) and press the shutterrelease button halfway to initiate focus.

g... The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e. use manual focus ( 28) or use focus lock ( 26) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph..g. In these cases. a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness).g. focus area contains both foreground subject and distant buildings). The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions. the subject is half in the shade).g.. a row of windows in a skyscraper). The focus area contains objects at different distances from the camera (e.. The subject appears smaller than the focus area (e.g..g. the subject is inside a cage). Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus 27 . the subject is the same color as the background).Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The subject contains many fine details (e. The focus area contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness (e. allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. or the in-focus indicator ( ) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep. There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background (e.

measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body.5mm (1. 28 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Focus .6 or faster. select manual focus mode and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. When using a lens that offers A-M selection.Manual Focus Controls used Use this option when the camera is unable to focus correctly using autofocus. the in-focus indicator may be displayed when the subject is not in focus. See the documentation provided with your lens for details. To focus manually. press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in-focus indicator ( ) is displayed. Photographs can be taken at any time.). even when the image is not in focus. The Electronic Range Finder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5. the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the portion of the subject in the selected focus area is in focus. With lenses that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority). Note that if the subject is one for which autofocus does not perform well ( 27). Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera. The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46. After positioning the subject in the active focus area.83in. focus can be adjusted manually with the lens set to M or M/A. Confirm that the image in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting. select M when focusing manually.

image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card. Image Quality and Size Large file size JPEG Fine Changes to image quality and size are reflected in the number of exposures remaining as shown in the shooting information display and viewfinder ( 5. Actual file size and memory card capacity may differ. higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory.Image Quality and Size Together. meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card. The approximate maximum file size of individual photographs and the total number of pictures that can be recorded at the selected setting are also shown in the shooting information display while image quality or size options are displayed ( 30). Larger. High<Image quality>Low JPEG Normal JPEG Basic Small file size Small Medium Small<Image size>Large Large Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size 29 . 6). Typical file sizes are listed on page 116.

Best choice in most situations.296 Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi 49.5cm (9.872×2.592 2.0in. Images are compressed less than NORM. 30 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size .896×1.2×32.872×2.5×9. Choose for images that will be retouched on a computer. Smaller file size suited to e-mail or the Web. NEF images are 3.5in.) 36.8×24.6×16.9cm (19.592 pixels in size.7cm (14. The following options are available: Image size L (default) M S Size (pixels) 3. producing higher-quality images. Compression ratio: roughly 1:4.4×13.944 1.Image Quality Controls used The camera supports the following image quality options (the first four are listed in descending order by image quality and file size): Option RAW FINE NORM (default) BASIC JPEG Format NEF Description Compressed raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to memory card.936×1. Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG RAW+B NEF+JPEG image. Compression ratio: roughly 1:8.) 24.7in. Compression ratio: roughly 1:16.7×6. When viewed on a computer.) Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. Image Size Controls used Image size is measured in pixels.

JPG”).. “_DSC0001.g.g. and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF (RAW) images or “JPG” for JPEG images.NEF (RAW)/RAW+B NEF (RAW) files can be viewed on a computer using Capture NX (available separately.JPG”).” where nnnn is a fourdigit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the camera.JPG” (e.NDF” ( 87). When photographs taken at this setting are deleted. File Names Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn. Small copies created with the small picture option in the retouch menu have file names beginning with “SSC_” and ending with the extension “. Image Quality ( 30)/Image Size ( 30) Image quality and size can also be set using the Image quality and Image size options in the shooting menu. use PictureProject or Capture NX to print NEF (RAW) photographs. 11— /Fn Button ( 77) Image quality and size can also be set using the command dial..xxx. while images recorded with the other options in the retouch menu have file names beginning with “CSC” (e. 103) or the supplied PictureProject software. only the JPEG image will be displayed. “CSC_0001. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of RAW+B have the same file names but different extensions. “SSC_0001. NEF (RAW) photographs can not be printed by most print services or by direct USB connection.. both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted. Images recorded at a Optimize Image > Custom > Color Mode setting of II (AdobeRGB) ( 69) have names that begin with an underscore (e.JPG”). When photographs taken at RAW+B are viewed on the camera. Files containing Image Dust Off reference data have the extension “. Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Image Quality and Size 31 . Capture NX ( 103) Capture NX (available separately) automatically checks for updates if an Internet connection is detected at startup. Be sure to update to the latest version before viewing NEF (RAW) files.g.

with a timed shutter-release delay. although the frame rate will drop once the buffer has filled. select Auto (flash off ) mode ( 18) or turn flash off ( 35) for burst phoContinuous (burst mode) tography. and using defaults for all other settings. in a continuous sequence. Use for self-portraits ( 33). 32 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Shooting Mode . In continuous mode. the shutter is disabled until enough data have been transferred to the memory card to make room for another photograph. self-timer mode can also be selected by pressing the self-timer button. 11— /Fn Button ( 77) If Self-timer (the default option) is selected for Custom Setting 11 ( /Fn button). Use to reduce blurring caused by remote camera shake ( 33). 2s Delayed remote Optional ML-L3 remote control required. shooting will continue to a maximum of 100 shots. The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count display in the viewfinder while the shutter-release button is pressed. Camera records photographs at up to about three frames per second while shutter-release button is pressed. Only one shot will be taken if flash fires.Shooting Mode Controls used Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time. rotating the mode dial to S or M and selecting a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster ( 41. Mode Single frame (default) Description Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed. The fastest frame rates can be achieved by choosing manual focus ( 28). Quick-response Optional ML-L3 remote control required. The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage. See the Appendix for information on the number of photographs that can be stored in the memory buffer. allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. 43). 10s Self-timer Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake ( 33). When the buffer is full. or with a remote control.

Single-frame or continuous shooting mode is automatically restored when self-timer mode ends. level surface. This prevents light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure. Take the photograph. Select one of the following shooting modes: Mode 10s Self-timer 2s Delayed remote Quick-response remote Description Shutter released about 10s after camera has focused. 1 2 Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable. then press it the rest of the way down to start the selftimer. Remote control: From a distance of 5m (16ft. The self-timer lamp will start to blink. the self-timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released.) or less. In delayed remote mode. the self-timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released. Shutter released about 2s after camera has focused. Self-timer mode ends when a photograph is taken or the camera is turned off. Self-timer: Press the camera shutter-release button halfway to focus. you can check focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. In quick-response remote mode. Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Shooting Mode 33 . Remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown. Shutter released when camera focuses. stopping two seconds before the photograph is taken. If the remote control is used with the camera in autofocus mode. 3 4 5 Frame the photograph. aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at the infrared receiver on the camera and press the shutter-release button on the ML-L3.Self-Timer and Remote Control Modes The self-timer or optional ML-L3 remote control can be used for self-portraits.

. or Modes . To prevent the flash from firing. Press the button to raise the flash. note that the built-in flash can not be used in . . lower the flash. Unless (off ) is selected. . The flash modes available depend on the mode selected with the mode dial. . Lowering the Built-in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use. Using the Built-in Flash: . and M Modes Rotate the mode dial to P. or M. and . The default flash setting for Digital Vari-Program modes is automatically restored when the mode dial is rotated to a new setting or the camera is turned off. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 Rotate the mode dial to Choose a flash mode. A. 34 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash . Choose a metering method and adjust exposure. the flash will pop up as required when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fire when a photograph is taken. The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken. Choose a flash mode. press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place. . A. Take pictures. S.Using the Built-in Flash Controls used The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit subjects. Using the Built-in Flash: P. . or mode. Take pictures. . S.

A Fill flash Red-eye reduction Rearcurtain+ slow sync * Red-eye reduction Rear-curtain sync Slow sync+ Slow sync red-eye reduction * SLOW is displayed after command dial is released. and M modes. • REAR (rear curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes. Custom Setting 14 (Built-in Flash) can be used for manual flash control. Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash 35 . Use to include background lighting in portraits. creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving subjects. In P. Auto Auto slow sync Auto+ red-eye reduction Off Off Auto slow sync+ red-eye reduction S.Flash Mode The flash modes available depend on the mode currently selected with the mode dial. Flash modes are described below. • AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit. The Button Flash mode can also be selected by pressing the button and rotating the command dial. A. 78) Use Custom Setting 10 (ISO auto) to adjust sensitivity for optimal flash output. . AF-assist lamp lights before flash fires. . flash pops up automatically when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required. flash will fire immediately after shutter opens. M Fill flash P. S. If this icon is not displayed. Custom Settings ( 76. • (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. press the button once to raise the flash and then select a flash mode by pressing the button and rotating the command dial. .” • SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. reducing “red-eye.

creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving subjects. The flash can be used again after a short pause. For information on optional flash units (Speedlights). only one picture will be taken each time the The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots. the flash fires just before the shutter closes. If the flash fires in continuous shooting mode ( shutter-release button is pressed. see below at left). Rear-Curtain Sync Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens (“front curtain sync”.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.The Built-in Flash Use with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300mm or non-CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18– 200mm ( 97–98). Front-curtain sync Rear curtain sync 36 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Using the Built-in Flash . In rear-curtain sync. 99). see “Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)” ( See “Flash Compensation” for information on controlling flash level ( 48). 32). The flash has a minimum range of 60cm (2ft. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction.

If ISO sensitivity is raised above the base setting of ISO 100 equivalent. Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/ISO Sensitivity 37 .” pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities are prone to mottling. preventing blur. or M to or a Digital Vari-Program mode automatically restores the default ISO sensitivity of Auto. (auto) and Digital Vari-Program modes also offer an Auto setting that allows the camera to automatically raise sensitivity when lighting is poor or lower sensitivity when lighting is bright. 10—ISO Auto ( 76) This option can be used to enable automatic ISO sensitivity control in P. Rotating the mode dial from P. allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. S. and M modes. A. When HI 1 is selected. Just as higher speed films tend to be “grainy. Sensitivity ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed. S. with a further high sensitivity setting of HI 1 available for an ISO equivalent of roughly 3200. The higher the ISO sensitivity. ISO Sensitivity ( 73) ISO sensitivity can also be set using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu. the less light needed to make an exposure. automatic ISO sensitivity control is disabled. ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and ISO 1600 in steps of 1EV.ISO Sensitivity Controls used Photographs taken at slow shutter speeds are prone to blurring. A. 11— /Fn Button ( 77) ISO sensitivity can also be set using the command dial. the same exposures can be achieved at faster shutter speeds.

. M Shooting mode ( 32) Focus mode ( 23) AF-area mode ( 24) . S. M Flexible program ( Default Matrix ±0 ±0 Auto Auto slow sync Fill flash Off 40) * Fine-tuning ( 70) reset to 0. . S. Custom Settings are not affected. . Digital Vari-Program P. S. . . P. A. P. 38 Reference: More on Photography (All Modes)/Two-Button Reset . .Two-Button Reset Controls used: button + button The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the and buttons down together for more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green dot). The monitor turns off briefly while settings are reset. Option Image quality ( 30) Image size ( 30) White balance ( 49) * ISO sensitivity ( 37) . A. . Default Settings See the Appendix for a list of default settings ( 113). A. M Default JPEG Normal Large Auto Auto 100 Single frame AF-A Closest subject Dynamic area Single area Option Metering ( 45) Flash compensation ( 48) Exposure compensation ( 47) Flash mode ( 34) .

camera selects shutter speed for best results. when aperture can be adjusted manually using the lens aperture ring (in other modes. The camera exposure meter and a variety of other features can not be used ( 97). Each of these modes offers a different degree of control over shutter speed and aperture: Mode P S Programmed auto ( 40) Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings. User chooses shutter speed. Set shutter speed to “bulb” or “--” for long time-exposures. A. the shutter-release will be disabled). Shutter Speed and Aperture The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and aperture. allowing you to freeze or blur motion and control depth of field. S. User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring. S. Shutter speed Aperture Fast shutter speed Small aperture (large f-/number) Slow shutter speed Large aperture (small f/-number) Reference: P. and M Modes P. Use to freeze or blur motion. and M Modes 39 . S. lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f/-number). 10—ISO Auto ( 76) Use this option to enable auto ISO sensitivity control in P. A. Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode M.P. white balance. including exposure ( 45). and image optimization. User chooses aperture. A. S. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus. Shutter-priority auto ( 41) Aperture-priority A auto ( 42) M Manual ( 43) Lens Aperture Ring When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring. and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings. camera selects aperture for best results. The following figure shows how shutter speed and aperture affect exposure. A. and M modes.

A. Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures (small f-/numbers) that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. choose another mode. To take photographs in programmed auto: 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to P. and M Modes/Mode P (Programmed Auto) . S. the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations. All combinations produce the same exposure. Frame a photograph. or turn the camera off. different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”). rotate the command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings. Flexible Program In mode P. Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures (large f/-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. focus. While flexible program is in effect. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. a indicator appears in the viewfinder. 40 Reference: P.Mode P (Programmed Auto) In this mode. and shoot.

using the built-in flash ( 34) or an optional Speedlight ( 99). and shoot.Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) In shutter-priority auto. and M Modes/Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) 41 . try increasing ISO sensitivity ( 37). Rotate the command dial until the desired shutter speed is displayed in the viewfinder (shutter speed can also be displayed in the monitor by pressing the button). in seconds (for example. Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto: 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to S. mounting the camera on a tripod. To prevent blur. when using a lens with a focal length of 300mm. 3 Frame a photograph. you choose the shutter speed from values between 30s and ¼. S.000 s while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. the shutter speed should be faster than the inverse of the focal length of the lens. A. or using a vibration reduction (VR) lens. high shutter speeds to “freeze” motion. A tripod is recommended when shooting at slower shutter speeds. focus. Shutter Speed and Camera Shake To prevent blur caused by camera shake. Reference: P. choose a shutter speed faster than 1/300 s).

and M Modes/Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) . To take photographs in aperture-priority auto: 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to A. bringing both the main subject and background into focus.Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) In aperture-priority auto. 3 Frame a photograph. Small apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of field. and shoot. focus. Rotate the command dial until the desired aperture is displayed in the viewfinder (aperture can also be displayed in the monitor by pressing the button). 42 Reference: P. Large apertures (low f/-numbers) soften background details. you choose the aperture from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. S. A.

76). below). Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays (see note below). ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted to compensate for changes in aperture and shutter speed.000 s. and shoot. S. focus. you control both shutter speed and aperture. Display at left indicates that picture will be overexposed by more than 2EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded. Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and ¼.or over-exposed at current settings. To set aperture (below right).Mode M (Manual) In manual exposure mode. the electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and shooting information display show whether the photograph would be under. To take photographs in manual exposure mode: 1 2 Rotate the mode dial to M. If indicator is to left of 0. If indicator is to right of 0. When On is selected for Custom Setting 10 (ISO auto. press the button). picture will be overexposed. Electronic Analog Exposure Display If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than is selected. and M Modes/Mode M (Manual) 43 . Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens. Display Description Optimal exposure. the displays will flash. or the shutter can be held open for indefinitely for longer exposures ( ). A. 3 Frame a photograph. Reference: P. rotate the command dial while pressing the ( ) button (to display shutter speed and aperture in the monitor. picture will be underexposed. with the result that changes to shutter speed and aperture will not affect the electronic analog exposure display. Display at left indicates that picture will be underexposed by 1/3 EV. Rotate the command dial to choose a shutter speed (see the illustration at left.

use a fully charged battery or an optional AC adapter ( 103).Long Time-Exposures Shutter speeds of “bulb” and “--” can be used for long time-exposure photographs of moving lights.” and then select delayed remote or quick-response remote mode ( 33). night scenery. To prevent blurring caused by camera shake. Note that noise may be present in long exposures. Shutter speed Description bulb Shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down. 103). Select mode M. or fireworks. S. 44 Reference: P. f/25 To prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete. choose On for the Noise reduction option in the shooting menu. Shutter opens -when the shutter-release button on the remote control is pressed and remains open for thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time. and M Modes/Mode M (Manual) . choose a shutter speed of “bulb. A. Optional remote control required. 35s. the stars. use a tripod or an optional remote control ( 33. before shooting.

even when background is much brighter or darker. A. S. CPU lens Type G lens Type D lens 5—Metering ( 75) Metering can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu. Camera meters a wide area of the frame and instantly sets exposure according to distribution of brightness. S. Camera meters exposure in active focus area only (if Closest subject is selected for AF-area mode ( 24). and M Modes/Exposure 45 . color. Reference: P. The following options are available when the mode dial is rotated to P. Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed. A. or M (matrix metering is used in other modes): Method Matrix Center-weighted Description Recommended in most situations. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. exposure is set using a 420-pixel RGB sensor.Exposure Metering Controls used The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure. distance. 97). camera will meter center focus area). and composition for natural results. Classic meter for portraits. type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering II). Spot Metering Metering is available with CPU lenses only. Use a type G or D lens for results that include range information (3D color matrix metering II. Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area. In matrix metering. With other CPU lenses.

an EL indicator will appear in the viewfinder. recompose the photograph and shoot. and M Modes/Exposure . exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background and the main subject may not be correctly exposed. S. position the subject in the center focus area). Then. While exposure lock is in effect. press the AEL/AF-L button to lock exposure. Position the subject in the selected focus area (when using center-weighted metering.Autoexposure Lock Controls used AE-L/AF-L button If the subject is not in the metered area when center-weighted or spot metering is used. Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect. Mode Programmed auto Shutter-priority auto Aperture-priority auto Setting Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program. 13—AE Lock ( 77) This option controls whether the shutter-release button locks exposure. Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock is released). Press the shutter-release button halfway and confirm that the in-focus indicator ( ) appears in the viewfinder. S. 12—AE-L/AF-L ( 77) This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button. 1 2 Select mode P. keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the selected focus area. A. 3 Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed. 46 Reference: P. Shutter speed Aperture 40) The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and shooting information display. or A and choose center-weighted or spot metering (exposure lock has no effect in mode M). the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure. This can be prevented by using autoexposure lock.

0EV Reference: P. A. negative values when the main subject is brighter than the background. S. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off. and M Modes/Exposure 47 . S. As a rule of thumb. –0.3EV +2. It is available only in P. –1EV No exposure compensation +2EV The Button Exposure compensation can also be adjusted by pressing the button and rotating the command dial until the desired value is shown in the viewfinder or shooting information display (P.Exposure Compensation Controls used Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure by up to ±5EV in increments of 1/3EV. S. and A modes and is most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering ( 45). Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. making pictures brighter or darker. Exposure compensation is shown in the shooting information display. The viewfinder display is illustrated at right. positive compensation may be needed when the main subject is darker than the background. and A modes only).

SB-600. or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.7EV 8—Flash Compensation ( 76) Flash compensation can also be adjusted from the Custom Settings menu. 48 Reference: P.0EV +0. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter. S. and SU-800 flash units ( 99). changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background. SB-800. A. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0. The viewfinder display is illustrated at right. –3.Flash Compensation Controls used Flash compensation (available only in P. The ( ) Button Flash compensation can also be adjusted by pressing the ( ) and buttons and rotating the command dial until the desired value is shown in the viewfinder or shooting information display. Flash compensation is also available with SB-400. Flash exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off. and M modes) is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to +1EV in increments of 1/3EV. Flash compensation is shown in the shooting information display. A. and M Modes/Exposure . S.0.

Fluorescent Use under fluorescent lighting. Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting. Reference: P.White Balance Controls used White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. S. Recommended for most sitAuto uations. Shade Use in daylight with subjects in the shade. A. Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight. The following options are available in P. or copy a value for preset white balance from an existing photograph. A. and M Modes/White Balance 49 . the White balance option in the shooting menu can be used to fine tune white balance. 11— /Fn Button ( 77) White balance can also be set using the command dial. Cloudy Use in daylight under overcast skies. Flash Use with built-in flash or optional Nikon flash units. S. Option White Balance ( 70) In addition to selecting white balance. other values can be selected according to the type of source. Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources. if necessary. and M modes (Auto is automatically selected in Digital Vari-Program modes): Description Camera sets white balance automatically. measure preset white balance. Use gray or white object or existing photograph as reference for white White balance preset balance ( 70).

54). Press multi selector left or rotate command dial left to view photographs in reverse order. The following operations can be performed in full-frame playback: To View additional photographs View photo information Zoom in on photo Delete photo Protect photo ( ) View thumbnails Exit to shooting Shutter button mode or View menus Retouch photo Display shooting information Use or Description Press multi selector to right or rotate command dial right to view photographs in order recorded. 53). 89). View menus ( 63). Photographs taken in “tall” (portrait) orientation are displayed in tall orientation as shown at right. Press multi selector up or down to view information about current photograph ( 51). 50 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera . Create retouched copy of current photograph ( Display shooting information ( 22). To return to shooting mode. Auto Image Rotation ( 88)/Rotate Tall ( 66) These options control whether photographs taken in “tall” orientation are rotated for display in the monitor during playback. 15—Auto Off Timers ( 78) Choose how long the monitor remains on before turning off automatically to save power. 7—Image Review ( 75) Choose whether to display photographs as they are taken. press the button. press shutter-release button halfway or press the button.More on Playback Viewing Photographs on the Camera To view photographs in the monitor. View multiple photographs ( 52). Zoom in on current photograph ( Delete current photograph ( Protect current photograph ( 54).

.Displayed if image was created using options in retouch menu............................... 11................... 4 Retouch indicator ......................... starting with most recent change.. 83 Time of recording ...........Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback..... 31 Image quality................. 30 Date of recording........................ 37 10 White balance/white 11 balance fine tuning. 69 Sharpening.......................................... 30 4 7 8 5 9 1 2 3 6 Shooting Data... 1 2 3 4 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera 51 ................ 30 1...... 11..... 85 5 6 7 8 9 File name........ 49... 78.....39–44 11 Frame number/total number of images Aperture.... File Information 1 Protect status.................................... 69 Saturation......... 45 10 Flash mode......................................... Press the multi selector up or down to cycle through the following information: File Information↔Shooting Data Page 1↔Shooting Data Page 2 ↔ Retouch History (retouched copies only)↔Highlights↔RGB Histogram↔File Information... Page 2 Protect status......... 54 7 Retouch indicator ..................... Page 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Protect status..... 54 2 Retouch indicator .............................. 68 9 ISO sensitivity 1 ....................................................................... 1 Metering .......................................... 70 12 6 Image size/ image quality............................... 89 8 Exposure compensation..................Displayed in red if ISO sensitivity value by auto ISO...39–44 1 2 3 5 7 9 4 6 8 10 11 Shooting Data..................................... 4 Frame number/total number of images 1.... 2................. 1 2 3 4 5 Tone compensation ........................... 89 3 Frame number/total number of images 4 Folder name ................ 47 Camera name 9 Focal length......................... 99 Shutter speed ...................................... 69 Image comment 2 ............................ 69 Color mode/hue............. 89 3 Retouch history: Lists changes made to image using options in retouch menu ( 89)........... 84 Frame number/total number of images was modified from selected 1 2 3 5 7 9 11 4 6 8 10 12 Retouch History 1 1 Protect status................................. 54 2 Retouch indicator ......................................... 54 7 Mode..... 89 8 Image optimization ...... 83 Image size........................................Only first 15 letters are displayed...............

....... press shutter-release button halfway or press the button.............. The vertical axis shows the number of pixels of each brightness in the image............ or Protect photo ( ) Exit to shooting Shutter button mode or View menus Display shooting information Protect highlighted photograph ( 54).......... 89 4 Histogram 1 2 3 4 Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback To display images in “contact sheets” of four or nine images..... 1 Protect status. press the button in full-frame playback............................... Use multi selector or command dial to highlight photographs......................... View highlighted photograph full frame.....Highlights Highlights are the brightest portions of the image............... Note that camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications.................................... The horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness... Display shooting information ( 22).................................... 54 3 Frame number/total number of images 2 Retouch indicator ............. Details may be lost (“washed out”) in areas of highlights that are overexposed. Delete highlighted photograph ( 54).... 89 3 Highlights (indicated by flashing border) 4 Frame number/total number of images 1 2 3 4 Histogram A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the image.. 52 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera ..... View menus ( 63)........... with dark pixels at the left and bright pixels at the right....... The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed: To Display more images per page Display fewer images per page View photo Highlight photographs Delete photo Use Description Increase number of images displayed from one (full-frame playback) to four or from four to nine... To return to shooting mode... 1 Protect status. Decrease number of images displayed from nine to four or from four to one (full-frame playback).............. 54 2 Retouch indicator ....

press shutter-release button halfway or press the button. Protect current photograph ( 54). down. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Display shooting information ( 22). Return to full-frame playback. Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera 53 . Press to zoom out. The following operations can be performed: To Zoom in and out Use / View other areas of image View other images Cancel zoom Delete photo Protect photo ( ) Exit to shooting Shutter button mode or View menus Display shooting information Description Press to zoom in to maximum of approximately 25× (large images). View menus ( 63). press multi selector up. Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered. 19× (medium images) or 13× (small images). or right to view areas of image not visible in monitor. area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. While photo is zoomed in. left. To return to shooting mode. Delete current photograph ( 54).Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom Press the button to zoom in on a photograph in full-frame playback. Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom ratio.

and have DOS “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. the button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full-frame. press the button again to delete the photograph. Deleting Individual Photographs Press the button to delete the photograph currently displayed in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list. Delete ( 65) This option can be used to delete multiple photographs. Note that protected files will be deleted when the memory card is formatted ( 13. Press the button to exit without deleting the photograph. Protected files can not be deleted using the button or the Delete option in the playback menu. To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted. and thumbnail playback. 54 Reference: More on Playback/Viewing Photographs on the Camera . Press the button to protect the photograph currently displayed in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list. press the button when the photograph is displayed in full-frame or zoom playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list. One of the following confirmation dialogs will be displayed. The photograph will be marked with a icon. zoom. 81).

x Windows 2000 Professional Choose Mass Storage † * See the websites listed on page x for the latest information on supported operating systems.3. † Do NOT select MTP/PTP. and then disconnect the camera and select Mass Storage. be sure the camera battery is fully charged. charge the battery before connecting the camera or use an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103). the Windows hardware wizard will be displayed. or TV/Connecting to a Computer 55 . Turn the camera off. Before Connecting the Camera Install PictureProject from the supplied installer CD.Connecting to a Computer. retouched. To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted.9 or 10. The supplied PictureProject software can then be used to copy photographs to the computer. Click Cancel to exit the wizard. If MTP/PTP is selected when the camera is connected. where they can be organized. Before connecting the camera. Connect the camera directly to the computer. or TV Connecting to a Computer The camera can be connected to a computer using the supplied USB cable. If in doubt. Printer.4. Connecting the USB Cable 1 2 3 Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up. Printer. Reference: Connecting to a Computer. Connect the supplied USB cable as shown. select the USB item in the camera setup menu and choose a USB option as described below. do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. and printed. Computer operating system * USB Windows Vista (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate editions) Choose MTP/PTP or Windows XP (Home Edition/Professional) Mass Storage Mac OS X version 10.

5 6 Transfer photographs to the computer using PictureProject. Be sure to update to the latest version. the monitor and viewfinder will display the indicators shown at right (when MTP/PTP is selected. Mac OS X Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D40X”) into the Trash. or TV/Connecting to a Computer . If Mass Storage is selected. Before connecting the camera. Printer. When Camera Control Pro is running. See the PictureProject Reference Manual (on CD) for more information. the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. 56 Reference: Connecting to a Computer. Windows Vista/Windows XP Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar ( ) and select Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device. the camera must first be removed from the system as described below. If MTP/PTP is selected for USB. “PC” will appear in the viewfinder and shooting information display.4 Turn the camera on. Camera Control Pro Camera Control Pro (available separately. If Mass Storage is selected for USB. set the camera USB option ( 84) to MTP/PTP. 103) can be used to operate the camera from a computer. Windows 2000 Professional Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar ( ) and select Stop USB Mass Storage Device. Capture NX automatically checks for updates if an Internet connection is detected at startup. During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. the normal shooting indicators are displayed). The computer will detect the camera automatically and display PictureProject Transfer.

After checking the printer. S. Select Cancel to exit without printing the remaining pages. Printing Via Direct USB Connection JPEG photographs can be printed directly from a camera connected to a PictBridge printer ( 117). photographs can be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) ( 61). If the center supports DPOF ( 117). RAW (NEF) photographs can not be printed by direct USB connection. They are displayed in the Print Select menu ( 60) but can not be selected for printing. When taking photographs for printing via direct USB connection in P. or TV/Printing Photographs 57 . Reference: Connecting to a Computer. press the multi selector up or down to highlight Continue and press OK to resume printing. the camera will display the dialog shown at right. • Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the printer manual for details). A. Printer.Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods: • Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera (see below). photographs can be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) ( 61). choose Ia (sRGB) or IIIa (sRGB) for the Custom>Color mode option in the Optimize image menu ( 68). • Transfer pictures ( 55) and print them from a computer using PictureProject or Capture NX (available separately. Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set (DPOF) ( 61) Select MTP/PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer ( 58) Print photographs one at a time ( 59) Print multiple photographs ( 60) Disconnect USB cable Create index prints ( 60) Printing Via Direct USB Connection If an error occurs during printing. If the printer supports DPOF ( 117). • Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center. 103). and M modes. Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW (NEF) pictures.

58 Reference: Connecting to a Computer. Turn the printer on. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. A welcome screen will be displayed. or press the button to zoom in on the current photo ( 53). To view six photographs at a time. Connect the supplied USB cable as shown. If in doubt. Use the multi selector to highlight photographs. Press the multi selector left or right to view additional photographs. or press to display the highlighted photograph full frame. 1 2 3 4 Set the camera USB option to MTP/PTP ( 84). followed by the PictBridge playback display. charge the battery or use an EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector (available separately. check that the camera battery is fully charged. Proceed to “Printing Pictures One at a Time” ( 59) or “Printing Multiple Pictures” ( 60). 5 Turn the camera on. press the button. 103). or TV/Printing Photographs . Turn the camera off.Connecting the Printer Before printing. Printer.

5x5in. Reference: Connecting to a Computer. Printer. or No time stamp. Printing can be interrupted at any time by pressing OK while printing is in progress. of press OK to select and return to print menu. Press multi selector up or down to choose number of copies (maximum 99). Letter. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Only options supported by the current printer can be selected. Use and buttons to choose size of crop and use multi selector to choose position of crop. Press multi selector up or down to choose Printer default (default for current printer). dialog shown at right will be displayed. A3. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option and press to the right to select. then press OK to select and return to print menu. To crop picture. Print time stamp (print time and date of recording on photo). 8x10in. press OK. Option Border Time stamp Cropping If Crop is selected. Press OK to return to print menu. Print with border (print photo with white border).... 4x6in. highlight Crop and press multi selector right. The menu shown at right will be displayed. Page Size. and Time Stamp Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi selector up or down to choose print style from Printer default (default for current printer). Description Menu shown at right will be displayed. 5x7in. then No. To exit without cropping picture. To start printing. Menu shown at right will be displayed. or TV/Printing Photographs 59 . Border. or A4. Press multi selector up or down to choose page size from Printer default Page size (default page size for current printer). then press OK to select and return to print menu. highlight No cropping and press OK. then press OK to select and return to print menu. or No border.Printing Pictures One at a Time To print the picture currently selected in the PictBridge playback display. highlight Start printing and press OK. copies Menu shown at right will be displayed.. The PictBridge playback display will be shown when printing is complete. 100x150mm. 3.

Printing Multiple Pictures To print multiple pictures or create an index print listing all JPEG photographs as small thumbnail images. press OK. or TV/Printing Photographs . press and hold button. To start printing. press OK to display menu of print options. Printer. Create index print of all JPEG photos. Printing Selected Photographs Choosing Print select displays the menu shown in Step 1. Display print options. To display current pic. To start printing. Choose page size. Option Description Print select Print selected pictures (see below). to 1. border. and time stamp options as described on preceding page (warning will be displayed if selected page size is too small).Select current picture and set number of prints ture full screen. Choose page Index print size. 3 4 Specify number of prints (up to 99). to maximum of 256. Selected pictures marked by icon. PictBridge menu will be displayed when printing is complete. PictBridge menu will be displayed when printing is complete. Confirmation dialog shown at right will be displayed. The menu shown at right will be displayed. 60 Reference: Connecting to a Computer. 1 2 Scroll through pictures. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option and press to the right to select. and time stamp options as described on page 59. To deselect picture. border. highlight Start printing and press OK. Print (DPOF) Print current DPOF print order ( 61). Repeat Steps 1–3 to select additional pictures. press multi selector down when number of prints is 1. press the button in the PictBridge playback display. Interrupting Printing To cancel printing and return to the PictBridge playback display. highlight Start printing and press OK.

1 Highlight Select/set. 2 Display selection dialog. Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer after the print order is created. • Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order. highlight Done and press OK. DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection. Note that RAW (NEF) photos can not be selected for printing.Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Printer. Reference: Connecting to a Computer. use the PictBridge Time stamp option. or TV/Printing Photographs 61 . to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order. Display options. select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Selected Photographs” to modify and print the current order ( 60). To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer. To complete print order and exit. Print Set The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order. Highlight option and press multi selector right: • Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order. Selecting Print set (DPOF) from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1. 3 4 Select pictures and specify number of prints as described in Steps 1–3 on previous page.

103) can be used to connect the camera to a television or VCR for playback or recording. Turn the camera off. images will be displayed on the television or recorded to video tape. 1 2 3 Choose the appropriate video mode ( 83). Connect the video cable as shown. 62 Reference: Connecting to a Computer. or TV/Viewing Photographs on TV .Viewing Photographs on TV An EG-D100 video cable (available separately. During playback. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable. Turn the camera on and press to begin playback. Printer. Use of an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector is recommended for extended playback ( 103). the camera monitor will remain off. Connect to video device Connect to camera 4 5 Tune the television to the video channel.

Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup ( Create retouched copies of existing photographs ( 89). To view the menus. Personalize camera settings ( 74). setup. Move cursor up Increase number Press up Press right Return to previous menu Press left Press down Move cursor down Decrease number Make selection Display sub-menu Menu Guide/Using Camera Menus 63 . 80). and retouch menus (see below) If “?” icon is displayed. Adjust shooting settings ( 68). and setup options can be accessed from the camera menus. Choose from playback. press the button. shooting. help for the current item can be viewed by pressing button Menu Playback Shooting Custom Settings Setup Retouch Slider shows position in current menu Current setting for each option is shown by icon Current menu item is highlighted Description Adjust playback settings and manage photos ( 65).Menu Guide Using Camera Menus Most shooting. playback. The multi selector and OK button are used to navigate the camera menus. Custom Settings.

64 Menu Guide/Using Camera Menus . 4 Position cursor in selected menu. 5 Highlight menu item. 3 Select menu. Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit the menus and return to shooting mode. Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.To modify menu settings: 1 Display menus. 7 Highlight option. 8 Make selection. The monitor will turn off. 6 Display options. 2 Highlight icon for current menu.

highlight and press multi selector down. Select photos for printing. 65 66 66 67 67 Delete The delete menu contains the following options: Option Selected All Description Delete selected photographs (see below). Choose folder for playback. Selection shown by icon. If the number of photographs to be deleted is very large. Rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photos during playback. To view highlighted picture full frame. Menu Guide/Playback Options: The Playback Menu 65 . 3 Repeat steps 1–2 to select additional pictures. press button. 80). Delete all photographs in the folder currently selected for playback. See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus. Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for deletion: 1 Highlight picture. To deselect picture. 4 Complete operation.Playback Options: The Playback Menu The playback menu contains the following options (options displayed may differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup menu option in the setup menu. some time may be needed to complete the operation. 2 Select highlighted picture. Option Delete Playback folder Rotate tall Slide show Print set (DPOF) Description Delete all or selected photos. Play photos back in automatic slide shows.

Rotate Tall Select On to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photos for display in the camera monitor. This option is Current selected automatically when a photo is taken. Select All to begin playback. Photographs taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation ( 88) will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation. If a memory card (default) is inserted and this option selected before photos have been taken.Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback: Description Only photos in the folder currently selected for Folders in the setup menu are displayed during playback. a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed during playback. Option To select the folder to which new photographs will be recorded. All Play back photos in all folders on the memory card. use the Folders option in the setup menu ( 85). 66 Menu Guide/Playback Options: The Playback Menu .

End slide show and return to playback menu. right to skip to next frame. The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback. Choose Deselect all? to remove all photos from the current print order. The following operations can be performed during a slide show: To Skip back/skip ahead View photo info Pause slide show Exit to playback menu Exit to playback mode Exit to shooting mode Display shooting information Use Description Press multi selector left to return to previous frame. Shutter Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode. Print Set (DPOF) Choose Select/set to select photographs for printing on a PictBridge printer or DPOF-compatible device ( 57).Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder. Pause slide show. End slide show and return to full-frame ( 50) or thumbnail playback ( 52). release Display shooting information ( 22). Menu Guide/Playback Options: The Playback Menu 67 . Change photo info displayed ( 51). Select Restart to restart the show or Exit to return to the playback menu. Start Start slide show. The following options are available: Option Description Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.

Softens outlines. Option Optimize image * Image quality Image size White balance * ISO sensitivity Optimize Image (P. 68–69 Choose image quality. and blues. 73 Reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities and slow Noise reduction 73 shutter speeds. and sharpness to produce vivid images with Vivid vibrant reds. while Adobe RGB is used in publishing and commercial printing. S.Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu The shooting menu contains the following options (options displayed may differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup menu option in the setup menu. S. Settings other than Custom use the sRGB color space. 80). * Available in P. Enhances saturation. and sharpness to produce crisp images with More vivid sharp outlines. 68 Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu . Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. tone compensation. and saturation. For consistent results over a series of photographs. greens. sharpening. 70 Choose image size. producing natural results suitable for portraits or retouching on a computer. 70 Raise sensitivity when lighting is poor. and M Modes) Optimize contrast. select Custom and choose a setting other than Auto for image sharpening. and other settings according to how photographs will be used or the type of scene. and M modes only. Custom Customize image optimization settings ( 69). contrast. Results are optimized for current shooting conditions and vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. A. Optimize Image Use a type G or D lens for best results. 70 Adjust colors according to the light source. See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus. Lowers contrast while lending natural texture and rounded feel to skin of porPortrait trait subjects. A. Maximizes saturation. Description Optimize images according to scene. sRGB is for general use. contrast. Option SO Softer VI VI PO BW Description N Normal (default) Recommended for most situations. Black-and-white Take photos in black-and-white.

and blues more purple. Default setting: IIIa (sRGB). Choose Moderate for less saturated colors. • Hue adjustment: Hue can be adjusted between –9° to +9° in increments of 3° (the degrees refer to the “color wheel” often used to express hue). greens more blue. Photos taken in modes Ia and IIIa are adapted to the sRGB color space and are suited for printing or use “as is. Default setting: Auto. Mode II is adapted to the Adobe RGB color space. 103). Choose Ia for portrait shots and IIIa for nature or landscape shots. • Tone compensation: Control contrast. After adjusting settings. Positive values make reds more orange. • Image sharpening: Choose how much outlines are sharpened during shooting. Choose high settings for sharp outlines. Lower settings prevent loss of detail in highlights under harsh lighting or in direct sunlight. • Color mode: Control color reproduction. Default setting: Auto. Enhanced for more vivid colors. highlight Done and press OK. Mode II is the preferred choice for photos that will be extensively processed or retouched. Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu 69 . • Saturation: Control the vividness of colors. low settings for softer outlines.Customizing Image Enhancement Options: Custom Select Custom to make separate adjustments to the following options. If the application supports color management. Default setting: Auto. Color Mode Modes Ia and IIIa are recommended for photos that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management.” with no further modification. Default setting: ±0. blues more green. See the Camera Control Pro manual for details. which supports a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Higher settings preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast subjects. Negative values make reds more purple. Choose Custom to select a user-defined tone curve created using Camera Control Pro (available separately. choose the Adobe RGB color space when opening photos taken in mode II. and greens more yellow.

Image Quality Select image quality ( 30). S. higher values to lend images a bluish tinge. Press the multi selector up or down to select a value for fine tuning. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance: Method Direct measurement Copy from existing photograph Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera ( 71). press OK to select and return to the shooting menu. and M Modes) Nine options are available for white balance. Fine-Tuning White Balance At settings other than White balance preset. White Balance (P. White balance is copied from photo on memory card ( 72). See “Reference: White Balance” ( 49). A. a “+” or a “–” will appear next to the white balance icon in the shooting information display. Image Size Choose image size ( 30). Preset White Balance Preset white balance can be used when the desired results can not be achieved at other settings or to match white balance to the value used in an existing photograph. white balance can be “fine tuned” by ±3 in increments of one (see page 118 of the Appendix for color temperature equivalents). 70 Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu . Choose lower values to make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red. Selecting an option other than preset in the white balance menu displays the menu shown at right. At settings other than ±0.

Display the shooting menu and select White balance> White balance preset (to proceed directly to Step 4 without displaying the shooting menu. Highlight Measure and press the multi selector right. no photograph will be recorded. Return to Step 2 and measure white balance again. Frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way down. “Take photo of white or gray object filling viewfinder under lighting for shooting” will be displayed. White balance will automatically be set to the measured value. highlight No and press OK). When the message clears from the display. Measure a value for preset white balance as described in Steps 5–6. highlight Yes and press OK (to set white balance to the last measured value and exit to shooting mode. White balance can be measured even when the camera is not in focus. the camera was unable to measure white balance.Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance 1 2 3 4 Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. The message. If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance. press and select another option for white balance. Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu 71 . A standard gray card can be used as a reference in studio settings. The menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit without measuring a preset value. the message “Data acquired” will be displayed. If the warning shown at right is displayed. Do alter exposure from the value selected by the camera. pressing the Fn button for about 2s when preset white balance is in effect will display the indicators shown in Step 4. when shooting in mode M. the viewfinder and shooting information white balance displays will flash as shown at right. 5 6 11— /Fn Button ( 77) If White balance is chosen for Custom Setting 11 ( /Fn button). select White balance preset for white balance in the shooting information display as described on page 49 and press OK). use the electronic analog exposure display to select optimum exposure.

Copying White Balance from a Photograph A white balance value copied from an existing photograph can be used for preset white balance. Select White balance>White balance preset in the shooting menu. The menu shown in Step 1 will be displayed.

1

2

Highlight Use photo. * Display current source photo. * To use last measured value ( 71), highlight Measure and press multi selector right.

3

4

Highlight Select image. † Display folder list. † To use current source photo, highlight This image and press OK.

5
Highlight folder.

6
Display images in selected folder.

7
Highlight photograph. ‡ To view highlighted picture full frame, press and hold button.

8

Set preset white balance to value for highlighted photograph and return to shooting menu. ‡ Images displayed may include those created with other cameras, but only photographs created with D40x can be used as source for preset white balance.

Note that if a new value is measured for white balance, white balance will be set to the measured value even if Use photo is currently selected in the preset white balance menu.

72

Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu

ISO Sensitivity
Adjust ISO sensitivity ( 37).

Noise Reduction
Photographs taken at high sensitivities or at shutter speeds of 8s or slower can be processed to reduce “noise” in the form of mottling or randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Choose from the following options:
Option Description Photographs taken at ISO sensitivities over ISO 400 or at shutter speeds of about 8s or slower are processed to reduce noise. In continuous shooting mode, frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop. (At shutter speeds of 8s or slower, “Job nr” will be displayed at the bottom of the viewfinder for a period of time equal to about onehalf to one times the current shutter speed. New photographs can be taken when “Job nr” clears from the display. Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete.) Noise reduction turns off at ISO sensitivities of 800 or less. Minimal noise reduction is still performed at ISO sensitivities over 800.

On

Off

Menu Guide/Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu

73

Custom Settings
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences. The following options are available when Simple (the default option) is selected for CSM/Setup menu in the setup menu ( 80):
Option R 1 2 3 Reset Beep Focus mode AF-area mode 74 74 75 75 Option 4 Shooting mode 5 Metering 6 No memory card?

75 75 75

To display the following options, select Full for CSM/Setup menu:
7 8 9 10 11 12 Option Image review Flash compensation AF-assist ISO auto /Fn button AE-L/AF-L 75 76 76 76 77 77 13 14 15 16 17 Option AE lock Built-in flash Auto off timers Self-timer Remote on duration 77 78 78 79 79

R: Reset
Select Yes to restore all Custom Settings to their default values. See the Appendix ( 113) for a complete list of default settings.

1: Beep
At the default setting of On, a beep will sound when the camera focuses in single-servo AF (AF-S or when shooting stationary subjects in AF-A autofocus mode), while the release timer is counting down in self-timer and delayed remote modes ( 33), or when a photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode ( 33). The beep will not sound when Off is selected. The current setting is shown in the shooting information display: is displayed when the beep is on, when it is off ( 6).

74

Menu Guide/Custom Settings

2: Focus Mode Select a focus mode ( 23). continuous. self-timer. photographs can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the button. 6: No Memory Card? If Release locked (the default setting) is selected. and remote control mode ( 32). and M Modes Only) Choose how the camera meters exposure ( 45). 5: Metering (P. If Off is selected. photographs will automatically be displayed in the monitor after shooting (the length of time photographs are displayed depends on the option selected for Custom Setting 15: Auto off timers). Choose Enable release to enable the shutter-release button when no memory card is inserted. the shutterrelease is disabled when no memory card is inserted. 25). 3: AF-Area Mode Choose how the camera selects the focus area in autofocus mode ( 24. S. 7: Image Review If On (the default setting) is selected. 4: Shooting Mode Select from single-frame. A. Menu Guide/Custom Settings 75 . Photographs will be displayed with the word “Demo” in the monitor but will not be saved.

sensitivity option. the camera may not be able to focus on poorly-lit subjects using autofocus. Note that noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Note that when the illuminator is off. 10: ISO Auto (P. the AF-assist illuminator will light when required to assist the focus operation ( 23). Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds. 9: AF-assist (All Modes Except and ) If On (the default setting) is selected and the subject is poorly lit. ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user ( 37). Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select mode A or M and choose a larger aperture.8: Flash Compensation (P. A. S. S. in daylight. and M Modes Only) If Off (the default setting) is selected. 76 Menu Guide/Custom Settings . the viewfinder and shooting information display show ISO-AUTO. When On is selected. or against a bright background. The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Max. and M Modes Only) Adjust flash level ( 48). shutter speed (slower shutter speeds may be used if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected for maximum sensitivity). Unless a flash is used. A. In modes P and A. Choose Off to disable the AF-assist illuminator. ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the selected value (flash level is adjusted appropriately). ISO Auto Auto ISO control is not available at an ISO sensitivity of HI 1. sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Min. If On is selected. these indicators blink when sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.

81). 49). exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Option Self-timer (default) Shooting mode Image quality/size ISO sensitivity White balance Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select shooting mode ( 32). Option AE/AF lock (default) AE lock only AF lock only Description Both focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected. The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. 13: AE Lock If Off (the default option) is selected. A. Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select white balance (P. The shutter-release button can not be used to AF-ON focus. At settings other than Self-timer (the default option). pressing the shutter-release button halfway does not lock exposure. If On is selected. Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select image quality and size ( 29). Press the Fn button and rotate the command dial to select ISO sensitivity ( 37). and M modes only. Menu Guide/Custom Settings 77 . S. 12: AE-L/AF-L Choose the function performed by the AE-L/AF-L button. the shooting information display will show a icon to the left of the setting that can be adjusted by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command dial (“Classic” display only. Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked until the button is AE lock hold pressed again or the exposure meters turn off. Exposure is unaffected.11: /Fn Button Description Press the Fn button to select self-timer mode ( 33). Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Choose the function performed by the Fn button.

m/ft. TTL (default): Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions. The camera does not turn off automatically when connected to a computer ( 55) or PictBridge printer ( 57). or 30minutes. 20°C/68 °F). 20s. Monitor and exposure meters remain on for 8s. 78 Menu Guide/Custom Settings . exposure meters remain on for 1minute. A. When Image review is on. 8s. and 10minutes. 1minute. Monitor remains on for 20s.. 8s. The Optional SB-400 Speedlight When an optional SB-400 Speedlight is attached. and M Modes Only) Choose a flash control mode for the built-in flash or the optional SB-400 Speedlight. 79). Option Short Normal (default) Long Custom Description Monitor and exposure meters remain on for 4s. Manual: The flash fires at the level selected in the menu shown at right. Choose monitor off delay and image review time from 4s. When Image review is on. At full power. Choose a shorter auto off delay for longer battery life. Custom Setting 14 is used to choose the flash control mode for the SB-400 and the name changes to Optional Speedlight. A icon flashes in the viewfinder and shooting information display when Manual is selected. 20s. the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 13/43 (ISO 100. pictures are displayed in monitor for 20s after shooting ( 75). Choose auto meter-off delay from 4s. When Image review is on. pictures are displayed in monitor for 4s after shooting ( 75). 1minute.14: Built-in Flash (P. the monitor and exposure meters remain on for the length of time selected for Custom Setting 17 (Remote on duration. 15: Auto off Timers Choose how long the monitor and exposure meters ( 14) remain on when no operations are performed. pictures are displayed in monitor for 4s after shooting ( 75). When a remote control is used ( 33). the exposure meters do not turn off automatically when the camera is powered by an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103). Note that the shooting information display turns off automatically when the exposure meters turn off. S. Auto Off Regardless of the setting chosen.

17: Remote on Duration Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote modes ( 33). Menu Guide/Custom Settings 79 . The default setting is 10s.16: Self-Timer Choose the length of the shutter-release delay in self-timer mode ( 33). Choose shorter times for longer battery life. The default setting is one minute.

Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu The setup menu contains the options listed below (options displayed may differ if My menu is selected for CSM/Setup menu. Highlight a menu name and press the multi selector right. The following options are available when To display the following additional options. 80 Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu .) See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus. The CSM/Setup menu item in the setup menu can not be selected. Display all options. A list of menu names will be displayed. Simple (the default option) is selected for select Full for CSM/Setup menu: CSM/Setup menu: Option Option CSM/Setup menu Format memory card Info display format Auto shooting info World time LCD brightness Video mode Language Image comment USB 80–81 81 81–82 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 Folders File no. sequence Mirror lock-up Firmware version Dust off ref photo Auto image rotation 85 86 86 86 87 88 CSM/Setup menu Choose the options displayed in the menus. The items in the selected menu will be listed as shown at right (the illustration shows the items listed when the playback menu is selected). Other menus list all options. Display only selected options. To choose menu items for display with My menu: 1 2 Highlight My menu and press the multi selector right. Option Simple (default) Full My menu Description Display only basic options in the Custom Settings ( 74) and setup menus (see above).

and M modes. .3 4 5 Press the multi selector up or down to highlight items and then press to the right to select or deselect. . Classic Graphic Wallpaper Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 81 . . . A. S. Note that choosing Classic also changes the background color for the menus. Note that this permanently deletes all photographs and any other data the card may contain. Repeat steps 2–3 to edit additional menus. Highlight Done in the list of menu names and press OK to return setup menu. Selected items are indicated by a check mark. Highlight Done and press OK to return to the list of menu names shown in Step 1. . Format Memory Card Select Yes to format the memory card. . Wallpaper uses the same menu background as the Graphic format. Info Display Format Choose one of the following shooting information display formats for Digital Vari-Program ( . Be sure that any valued files have been copied to a computer before formatting. and ) modes and P. Formatting Memory Cards Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while formatting is in progress.

.......................................................................................................................68 Focus area display ............... Press OK to select the highlighted picture and return to the setup menu...................... 35 13 Exposure compensation value..........71 PC mode indicator...................... 30 The design of the Wallpaper format is the same as the Graphic display except that a user-selected photograph is displayed in the background and the shutter speed and aperture displays do not appear ( 6)......................................76 Optimize image indicator ... 49 22 Image size...... 82 Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu ....................................................Classic format is shown below......... To choose a photograph for the Wallpaper format: 1 2 3 Highlight Select wallpaper and press the multi selector right.. Wallpaper can not be viewed during playback or copied to a memory card.................................................. 30 23 Image quality.................................................. To view the highlighted photograph full screen................................... 16.... 32 20 ISO sensitivity..................................................................................................................................... 15................ 39–44 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ....56 Manual flash control indicator........................................ 24............................39–44 12 Flash sync mode. 1 23 22 2 11 21 20 3 4 10 9 12 13 5 6 7 8 14 19 18 17 16 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Mode ........4 Shutter speed.. 48 16 Metering mode ................15 Number of exposures remaining............. 43 Exposure compensation. 47 14 Help indicator........................ 14....................... Press the multi selector left or right to highlight a photograph............................................................................................................................................................. 26 AF-area mode ......................................... 23 19 Shooting mode...............78 Flash compensation indicator for optional Speedlight ............................ The camera will store the new wallpaper and use it in the shooting display whenever Wallpaper is selected...............24 “Beep” indicator ............. Any existing wallpaper (including the default image provided with the camera) is deleted when a new image is selected and can not be restored...................... 3 15 Flash compensation value ................... 24 18 Focus mode................. 116 Preset white balance recording indicator ....................................................................101 10 Electronic analog exposure display............................................................................................................... 25.. press and hold the button.......... The photographs on the memory card will be displayed as shown at right...................... 37 21 White balance mode ........... 47 11 Aperture (f/-number)........ 45 17 AF-area mode......................................................74 Battery indicator..................................................................

day. Video Mode Choose NTSC when connecting the camera to an NTSC television or VCR. Set the camera clock ( 11). If Custom Setting 7 (Image review) is off. The camera clock will automatically be reset to the time in the selected zone. Three days of charging will power the clock for about one month. .01. S. Turn daylight saving time on or off. . Set the clock to the correct date and time. and year are displayed. Choose PAL when connecting the camera to a PAL video device. Turn Auto shooting info on if you find yourself frequently checking camera settings. The camera clock is automatically advanced or set back one hour. If “Clock not set” is displayed in the monitor. . rechargeable power source. which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103).00:00:00. Reset the clock regularly for accurate time keeping. the monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed. Option Time zone Date Date format Daylight saving time Description Choose the time zone. LCD Brightness Adjust monitor brightness between –2 (darkest) and +2 (brightest). The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent. Note that even if On is selected. and ) modes or P. and M modes. the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset to a time starting at 2007. .Auto Shooting Info Choose whether to automatically display shooting information in the monitor in Digital Vari-Program ( . shooting information will also be displayed after a photograph is taken. Select On to automatically display shooting information after the shutter-release button is released. Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 83 . World Time Set the camera clock to the current date and time. . A. Choose the order in which the month. .01.

Language Choose the language for camera menus and messages from: De En Es Fi Fr It Nl Pl Deutsch English Español Suomi Français Italiano Nederlands Polski German English Spanish Finnish French Italian Dutch Polish Pt Português Portuguese Ru Russian Sv Svenska Swedish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Korean Image Comment Add a comment to photographs as they are taken. Image Comment Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters. or press to exit without changing the comment. Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. 103) or PictureProject. Any additional characters will be deleted. See “Connecting to a Computer” for information on selecting a USB option for use with PictureProject ( 55). USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer. rotate command dial. Name area: Comment appears here. press . To move cursor. • Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu. • Attach comment: A comment is added to all photographs taken while this option is checked. Input a comment as described below. 84 Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu . To delete the character at the current cursor position. Choose MTP/PTP when connecting to a PictBridge printer or using Camera Control Pro (available separately). Highlight this option and press the multi selector to the right to toggle the check mark on or off. Comments can be viewed in Capture NX (available separately. Press to save changes and return to the image comment menu. press OK to select. • Input comment: The following dialog will be displayed.

rotate command dial. Any additional characters will be deleted. the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the current folder number (e. For example. To delete the character at the current cursor position. press OK to select. • Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card. Current folder ND40X (default folder) Other folders (in alphabetical order) • New: Create a new folder and name it as described in “Naming Folders. The camera treats folders with the same name but different folder numbers as the same folder. Press to save changes and return to the setup menu. 102NIKON. folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned automatically by the camera (e. Naming Folders Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters. or delete folders or choose the folder in which new photographs will be stored.g. photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON. Name area: Folder name appears here. or press to exit without creating a new folder or changing the folder name. 100ND40X). rename. During shooting. If a photograph is taken when the current folder if full or contains a photograph numbered 9999. • Rename: Select a folder from a list and rename it as described in “Naming Folders. etc. Each folder can contain up to 999 photographs. 101ND40X).” below. Renaming changes all folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact.Folders Create.” below.g. if the folder NIKON is selected for Select folder. • Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored. Folder Names On the memory card. To move cursor. press ... 101NIKON.) will be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder ( 66). Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 85 . Folder names can be up to five characters long. pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the selected name.

a new folder will be created and file numbering will begin again from 0001.File No. • On: File numbering continues from the last number used after a new folder is created. Sequence Choose how the camera names files. the memory card is formatted. the memory card is formatted. File Numbering If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999. the shutter release will be disabled and the monitor and viewfinder displays will show that the card is full. or a new memory card is inserted. turn it off and format the memory card or insert another memory card in the camera. • Reset: As for On. 86 Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu . Mirror Lock-Up Lock the mirror in the up position when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass filter that protects the camera image sensor ( 105). If File no. or a new memory card is inserted. Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version. except that file numbering is reset to 0001 with the next photograph taken (if the current folder already contains photographs. sequence is on. a new folder will be created). • Off (default): File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999.

2 3 With the lens ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit. focus will automatically be set to infinity. See the Capture NX manual for more information. featureless white object. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50mm is recommended. The message shown at right will be displayed and “rEF” will be appear in the viewfinder. Image Dust Off Dust off ref photo is available with CPU lenses only. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX (available separately. see the Capture NX manual). If using a zoom lens. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed. Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software. frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway. in manual focus mode. for more information. In autofocus mode. The same reference image can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Image Dust Off is used to reduce the effects of dust in NEF (RAW) photographs. Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu 87 . set focus to infinity manually. histograms and highlights are not displayed. 1 Highlight On and press OK. zoom all the way in. If the reference object is too bright or too dark.

88 Menu Guide/Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu . Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down. orientation recorded for first shot applies to all images in same burst.Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On (the default option) is selected contain information on camera orientation. even if camera orientation is changed during shooting. * The following orientations are recorded: Landscape (wide) Camera rotated 90° Camera rotated 90° orientation clockwise counter-clockwise * In continuous mode ( 32). allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback ( 50) or when viewed in Capture NX (available separately. 103) or PictureProject.

80). 2 Display retouch menu. 91 Trim Create cropped copies of existing photographs. the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full-frame playback or from the retouch menu. Other options copy RAW photos as JPEG Fine quality images. red-eye correction. 92 Small picture Create small copies of existing photographs. or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card.592 pixels in size. save where otherwise noted. resized. 94–95 * Not available with photographs taken with Black-and-white selected for Optimize image. copies created from RAW photos are 3. † If sub-menu is displayed. Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies. sepia. or cyanotype. although this may result in loss of quality. Retouching Copies Copies created with Small picture or Trim can not be further modified. repeat Steps 3–4 to select options from sub-menu. 92–93 Image overlay Combine two RAW photographs into a single image. 3 4 Highlight menu item. press button.872×2. and filter effects can not be applied to monochrome copies. To exit to full-frame playback without creating modified copy. Option Description D-lighting * Brighten dark or back-lit subjects or produce effects similar to the flash.Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed. Except in the case of Image overlay. The following options are available (options displayed may differ if My menu is selected for the CSM/Setup menu option in the setup menu. * Display retouch options. 90 Red-eye correction * Correct “red-eye” caused by the flash. Image Quality Small picture creates JPEG Fine copies (1:4 compression ratio). † * Image overlay is not available during full-frame playback. Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 89 . Image overlay creates copies at the current image quality setting. 92 Filter effects * Create copies with color filter effects. 50). 91 Monochrome * Copy pictures in black-and-white. D-lighting. See “Using Camera Menus” ( 63) for more information on using the menus. In full-frame playback: 1 Display photo in full-frame playback ( 20.

3 4 Highlight photo.To create retouched copies from the retouch menu: 1 Highlight menu item. Before After Press the multi selector up or down to choose the amount of correction performed. * Display retouch options. † * To view selected picture full frame. making it ideal for dark or back-lit photographs. press button. Press OK to copy the photograph and return to full-frame playback. Retouching Photographs The D40x may be unable to display or retouch photographs that were created with other models of camera or that have been modified using a computer or other device. press and hold button. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. D-Lighting D-lighting brightens shadows. † To exit to playback mode without creating modified copy. 90 Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu . 2 Display selection screen.

No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye. the copy may be 2. to zoom out. press multi selector up. cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.920×1. a copy will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects.280×960. 1. down. Zoom in and out / View other areas of image Create copy Trim Choosing this option displays the selected image full frame as shown below.560×1.440.920. area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. To create a cropped copy of the selected image: To Zoom in and out View other areas of image Create copy Use / Description Press to zoom in. or right to view areas of image not visible in monitor. Confirm the effects of redeye correction and create a corrected copy as described in the following table. Depending on the size of the crop. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye. left. down. 1. 960×720. If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph. left. Navigation window is displayed while / buttons or multi selector is pressed. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. press multi selector up. or right to view areas of image not visible in monitor. Save the area currently visible in the monitor as a separate file and return to full-frame playback. to zoom out.Red-Eye Correction Selecting this option displays a preview image as shown below. Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken using the flash. or 640×480 pixels in size. While photo is zoomed in. Trim: Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG Fine. Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 91 . To Use Description Press to zoom in. check the preview thoroughly before proceeding. While photo is zoomed in.

Suitable for e-mail. Filter Effects Choose from the following options. differs from that described at the beginning of this section: instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size. The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from the retouch menu. or down to increase the amount of magenta. Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of the selected image. After adjusting filter effects as described below. Press OK to create a monochrome copy and return to full-frame playback. green. Suited to display on Web pages. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right. giving the copy filter “warm” red cast. press OK to copy the photograph and return to full-frame playback. Sepia. Press the multi selector up to increase the amount of green. the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy at the selected size as described on the following page. Option Small Picture Create a small copy of the selected picture. right to increase the amount of red. Warm Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects. The following sizes are available: Option 640×480 320×240 160×120 Description Suited to television playback. however. left to increase the amount Color of blue. making the picture less Skylight blue.Monochrome Choose from Black-and-white. down to decrease. and blue histograms giving the distribution of tones in the copy ( 52). The effect can be previewed in the monitor. and Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome). The effect balance is displayed in the monitor together with red. The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on page 89. Description Creates the effect of a sky light filter. press the multi selector up to increase color saturation. 92 Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu .

9 10 Highlight Yes. 4 Make selection and return to previous menu. Viewing Small Pictures Small pictures are indicated by a gray border during playback. * To return to Step 7 without creating copies. Playback zoom is not available when small pictures are displayed. Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 93 . Selected pictures are marked with icon. 3 Highlight desired picture size. 8 Confirmation dialog displayed. highlight No and press OK.Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1. 7 Select pictures ( 65). Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures. 1 Highlight Choose size. 2 Display options. 5 Highlight Select picture. * Copy photos and exit to full-frame playback. 6 Display selection screen. Press MENU to exit to retouch menu without creating copies.

0. The selected image will appear as Image 1. press and hold the button. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.1 and 2. Press OK to select the highlighted image and return to the preview display. The preview dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted. Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing the multi selector up or down to select the gain for image 1 from between 0.5 cuts gain in half.Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals. A picture selection dialog will be displayed. selecting 0. The default value is 1. before creating an overlay. Repeat Steps 2–5 to select the second photo and adjust gain.0. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press the multi selector right. all options are available). 94 Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu . To create a RAW image. set image quality and size ( 30. while selecting 2. choose an image quality of NEF (RAW). Press OK. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings. Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the first photograph in the overlay.0 doubles gain. Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Image 2. To view the highlighted photograph full frame.

aperture. and image orientation) and values for white balance and optimize image as the photograph selected for Image 1. After an overlay is created. shutter speed. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight one of the following options and press OK. press . the camera will enter full-frame playback ( 50) with the new picture displayed in the monitor. focal length.7 Press the multi selector left or right to highlight the Preview column. To return to Step 6 and select new photos or adjust gain. exposure mode. • Save: Save the overlay without viewing a preview. exposure compensation. Press OK to save the new image. Other images are not displayed on the selection screen. Menu Guide/Creating Retouched Copies: The Retouch Menu 95 . • Overlay: Preview the overlay as shown at right. The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording. metering. Image Overlay Only RAW photographs created with the D40x can be selected for image overlay.

The size of the area exposed by the D40x.6×15. meaning that the picture angle of a 35-mm camera is approximately 1.Technical Notes Optional Accessories One advantage of digital SLR cameras is the wide variety of accessories they support. Flash units (Speedlights) ML-L3 remote control Viewfinder accessories Lenses Batteries Software Filters AC adapters AC adapter connectors Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements.8 mm) Picture angle (35-mm format) Picture angle (D40x) 96 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories .8.5. Picture Angle and Focal Length The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm camera is 36×24mm. in contrast.5 times that of the D40x. The approximate focal length of lenses for the D40x in 35-mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1. THE USE OF NONNIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.6 mm × 15. See our web sites or product catalogs for up-to-date information on accessories for the D40x. is 23. Picture size (35-mm format) (36 mm × 24 mm) Lens Picture diagonal Picture size (D40x) (23.

8D 2 AF-S/AF-I teleconverter 4 Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P Nikkor Focus Mode Digital Vari Program. 300mm f/2. PN-11) * * Electronic range finder can be used if maximum effective aperture is f/5. or Series E Nikkor • Medical Nikkor 120mm f/4 (can only be used at shutter speeds slower than 1/125s) • Reflex Nikkor (electronic range finder can not be used) • PC Nikkor (electronic range finder can not be used when shifting or tilting lens) • AI-type teleconverter * • PB-6 Bellows focusing attachment (attach in vertical orientation. 600mm f/4D IF * Type G and D Lenses Type G and D AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses ( 45) are recommended for use with the D40x. Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.8S.8S.8D IF. 400mm f/2. other CPU lenses (including AF lenses not equipped with an autofocus motor) can be used in manual focus mode. . • AI-modified.5S. Type G and D lenses support 3D color matrix metering II ( 45). 300mm f/2. 200mm f/2G IF. 400mm f/2.5S is zoomed while focusing at mini• AF-S VR ED: 70–200mm f/2. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring. Focus manually using image in • AF-S ED: 80–200mm f/2. 300mm f/2. which are equipped with an autofocus motor.8D IF. S.8G IF.8D IF. AF-S and AF-I lenses by “AF-S” or “AF-I” at the beginning of the lens name. and TTL flash control can not be used. With maximum effective aperture of f/5. 13. 400mm f/2. MF (with electronic M AF MF range finder) P. A — 5 3 5 6 7 Metering . image on matter screen in viewfinder may not be in focus 200–400mm f/4G IF when in-focus indicator is displayed. AI-.8D II IF.8D II IF. 3. 4. the electronic range finder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5. metering. * Autofocus not available with TC-17E II/TC-20E II AF-S teleconverter. Compatible with the following lenses: 6.8D IF. Except where otherwise noted.5–4. viewfinder as guide. Camera exposure metering and flash control may not function when 600mm f/4D IF * lens is shifted and/or tilted or aperture is not at maximum. The following CPU lenses can be used with the D40x. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts ( 45). 500mm f/4D IF *. Non-CPU Lenses The non-CPU lenses listed below may be used. 12. Electronic range finder can not be used when shifting or tilting lens. can be used in horizontal orientation once attached) * • Auto extension rings (PK 11A.8G IF (autofocus not supported) f/3. 2. electronic analog exposure display. With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.8D IF.5–4. 35–70mm f/2. Vibration reduction is available with Type G and D VR lenses only. 500mm f/4D 7. 500mm f/4D IF *. • AF-I ED: 300mm f/2.Lenses Autofocus is supported only with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses. Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 97 .or 28–85mm f/3. AF-I Nikkor PC-Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2. but only when the camera is in mode M.6 or faster. mum range. 300mm f/4D IF *. 1 — — — 1.6 or faster. 5.8G IF.6 or faster. IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used. Camera setting Lens/accessory AF-S. AI-S. Spot metering meters selected focus area. II IF *. 600mm f/4D II IF *. If AF 80–200mm f/2. the camera autofocus system. new-model 28–85mm • AF-S VR Micro ED: 105mm f/2.

1. 2.5–5. 1.6G AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2. 1.8G AF ED 18–35mm f/3. 2in.5m / 4ft.0m / 3ft.5–5.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200) • Old-model PC 35mm f/3.5.6G • AF-S DX IF ED 17–55mm f/2. range 3. 10in. TC-16 Teleconverter) • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier) • PC 35mm f/2.5D AF-S DX ED 18–70mm f/3.5 • Old-model 1000mm f/6.6m / 2ft. 3in.6.3 Reflex • 1000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers 142361–143000) • 2000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers 200111–200310) AF-Assist Illumination/Red-Eye Reduction AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses: • AF-S VR ED 70–200mm f/2.8G • AF-S ED 17–35mm f/2. 1. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera or lens.0m / 6ft. 3in. 3in. 3in.6.0m / 3ft. 0. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below: Lens AF-S DX ED 12–24mm f/4G AF-S ED 17–35mm f/2.0m / 3ft.6G Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator can interfere with red-eye reduction.).5m / 8ft. OP 10mm f/5.Incompatible Non-CPU Lenses and Accessories Do NOT attempt to use the following non-CPU lenses and accessories. 1.5G AF 20–35mm f/2. 3in. • TC-16A AF Teleconverter • Non-AI lenses • Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.8D • AF-S DX VR ED 18–200mm f/3. 3in.8D • AF-S VR ED 200–400mm f/4G • AF-S VR ED 200mm f/2G At ranges under 1m (3ft.0m / 9ft.6m / 2ft.5–4. 1. 800mm f/8. 1. 1. 1. 0.0m / 6ft. 3in. 2.5–5. 3in. 3in. 0.8D AF-S VR ED 24–120mm f/3. 1. 1200mm f/11) • Fisheye (6mm f/5.6) • Old-model 21mm f/4 • K2 rings • ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers 174041–174180) • ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers 174031–174127) • 200–600mm f/9.8D • AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2. 3in. 0. 0. 2. 3in.0m / 3ft.5–5.6. The Built-in Flash The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300mm.8D AF-S VR ED 200–400mm f/4G AF-S DX ED 18–135mm f/3.0m / 3ft. 0. 3in.5–4.8G • AF-S VR ED 300mm f/2. 2in.6m / 2ft. 3in. 11in.8G • AF-S ED 80–200mm f/2. 2.0m / 3ft.5m / 4ft.6G 98 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories .5.6G AF-S DX VR ED 18–200mm f/3.5mm f/5. 0.0m / 3ft.8D Zoom position 20mm 24mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 28mm 35mm 45–55mm 24mm 28–35mm 18mm 24–70mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 24mm 28–120mm 35mm 50–70mm 250mm 300–400mm 18mm 24–135mm 24mm 35–200mm Min. 8mm f/8. 3in.6m / 2ft. 600mm f/5.5–5. 3in. 7in. 7in.0m / 3ft. AF-S DX ED 17–55mm f/2.6m / 2ft. the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor: • AF-S VR ED 24–120mm f/3.6m / 2ft.0m / 3ft.5m / 8ft. 11in. 3in. 3in.6m / 2ft. 7. 200mm f/3. 3in.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490) • Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2. 0. 3in. 1. 0.8.6m / 2ft.6m / 2ft.

Before attaching an optional flash unit.. SB-800. The SB-800 and SB-600 can also be rotated 180° left and 90° right. multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1. the D40x supports the advanced Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS). it can be controlled using an optional SB-800 Speedlight or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander. Although it can not be mounted directly on the accessory shoe. and SB-600 Speedlights These high-performance Speedlights have Guide Numbers of 21/69 (18-mm zoom coverage). 4in. 80DX. SB-800. respectively). SB-R200 Wireless Remote Speedlight This high-performance wireless remote Speedlight has a Guide Number of 14/49 (m/ft. and SB-600 Speedlights or SB-R200 wireless remote Speedlight. 20°C/68 °F). ISO 200. SB-400.6 is 21÷5. including the SB400. For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity. and 30/98 (35-mm zoom head position) respectively (m/ft.4). such as the SB-800 and SB-600. 22S. or R200 flash units. When used with compatible flash units such as the optional SB-400. 38/125 (35-mm zoom head position). 20°C/68 °F. and 29S to be mounted directly on the camera without a sync cable.). 23. SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander The SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-800. It is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin. 600. placed on an AS-20 Speedlight stand. 800.6=12ft. 28DX. See the Speedlight manual for details. Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power. ISO 100. The SB-R200 can be hand-held.6 or about 3. The built-in flash will not fire when an optional Speedlight is attached. The flash head can be rotated through 90° above the horizontal for bounce-flash or close-up photography. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.7 meters (or in feet. For example. Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 99 . ensuring that the illuminating angle is adjusted in accord with lens focal length and have both a built-in wide panel that can be used for an angle of 14mm (the SB-800 also supports 17mm) and an illuminator that can be used when adjusting settings in the dark. its range at an aperture of f/5. at ISO 100 the SB-400 has a Guide Number of 21m or 69ft. 28. 69÷5. The SB-800 and SB-600 support auto power zoom (24–105mm and 24–85mm. 27. divide the Guide Number by the aperture. remove the accessory shoe cover. GN at ISO 100 is 10/32).Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) The accessory shoe allows SB-series Speedlights. or mounted on the camera lens using the SX-1 attachment for remote control and close-up i-TTL photography. and the SB-800 can be rotated 7° below the horizontal. including i-TTL flash control and Flash Color Information Communication. 600.

6. Available when camera is used to select flash mode. Non-TTL auto is selected automatically when a non-CPU lens is attached. Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with Speedlight. SB-16B. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation. The AS-15 Accessory Shoe Adapter When the AS-15 accessory shoe adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera accessory shoe. Auto aperture is selected automatically if CPU lens is attached. SB-29 2 SB-21B 2. 2. Flash charge state is shown by the Speedlight flash-ready indicator. A. SB-23.The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units: Speedlight Flash mode/feature i-TTL 2 AA Auto aperture 2 A Non-TTL auto GN Range-priority manual M Manual RPT Repeating flash REAR Rear-curtain sync Red-eye reduction Flash Color Information Communication AF-assist for multi-area AF 2 Auto zoom Auto ISO Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB-400 SB-800 SB-600 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200 3. SB-15 — 1. Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units. 4. and M modes. SB-28DX. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section. flash mode is automatically set to TTL and light only. 5. 2. but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Flash mode SB-26.8G IF Micro 4. Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode. i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR. 7. S. Set Speedlight to A (non-TTL auto) mode. lower built-in flash and use optional Speed. SB-22. 3. the shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be taken. Otherwise i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR is used. SB-27 3. Can be selected from camera Custom Settings menu ( 78). The following Speedlights can only be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes at shutter speeds of 1/200 s or slower. contact a Nikon-authorized service representative for more information. flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable. Autofocus is available only with AF-S VR ED 105mm f/2. 8. 100 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories . SB-24 A Non-TTL auto M Manual RPT Repeating flash REAR Rear-curtain sync 4 SB-50DX 1. 4 3 6 6 3 5 7 7 5 8 5 8 7 5 5 — — — 4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1. shutter release is disabled. SB-20. Nikkor lenses. When mounted on D40x. CPU lens required. SB-28. In P.3. Speedlight SB-80DX. Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights. NonTTL auto is selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached. SB-29s 2 — — SB-30. SB-22S. SB-25. In TTL mode. Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode.

4 4. Fill flash is automatically selected if the flash mode is set to off or auto when an optional Speedlight is attached.6 6. the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed. The D40x is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX. and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination (the SU-800 does not provide AF-assist illumination in close-up mode).g. Higher values may not produce the desired results at some ranges or apertures. .Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. S. or against a bright background. If the controls on the SB-800. the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction. The optional Speedlight will not fire when the camera is in mode. Auto with red-eye reduction becomes red-eye reduction. .7 8 9. or mode. refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. . as this may produce incorrect exposure.5 11 For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor. If the Speedlight supports the Creative Lighting System. auto slow sync with red-eye reduction becomes slow sync with red-eye reduction. SB-28DX. . will appear in the camera shooting information display. The following flash modes are available: • . i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. When an SC-series 17. . This may result in foreground subjects being underexposed in photographs taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds. Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or choose a larger aperture. With other Speedlights. Auto power zoom is available only with SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights. SB-600. . The SB-400. • mode: Auto slow sync becomes slow sync. ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal flash output when an optional SB-400. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above. . the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens. A. . If AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in . . or SB-600 Speedlight is attached. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels. and SB-50DX manuals. and off becomes slow sync. correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. the built-in flash will turn off and the optional Speedlight will fire whenever a photograph is taken. .. . . the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) varies with ISO sensitivity: Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of Mode 100 200 400 800 1600 P. and modes: Fill flash and red-eye reduction. . . Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 101 . In the following modes. aperture is stopped down by half an f/stop. . or modes or On is selected for Custom Setting 10 (ISO auto) in P.7 8 5. in daylight. or M mode. If an optional Speedlight is attached with the camera in . We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. SB-800. use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the Speedlight. or SU-800 are used to adjust flash compensation. . . In i-TTL mode. SB-800. .6 6. 28. SB-600. or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography. from 200 to 400). The shutter will synchronize with an external flash at speeds of 1/200 s or slower. . and SB-600 provide red-eye reduction. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken. while the SB-800.8 5.

2GB *. –3. If card will be used with card reader or supports 2GB and 4GB cards. R60. water. Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards. telephoto lenses. 256MB.5m–1). • Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y48. 1GB (Platinum II/Professional). Use the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead. Viewfinder • DG-2 magnifier: Magnify the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for close-up photography. –2. Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. B12). B8. • Do not bend.5. +1. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. and other tasks that require added precision. A2. ND8S. B2. 4GB *† Lexar 128MB. allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in portrait orientation.7 to +0. 512MB. 2GB (Platinum II/Professional)* * If card will be used with card reader or other device. 1GB. All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used. O56. 512MB. Do not remove memory cards from the camera. other filters may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding. Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved. Filters • When using an R60 filter. Approved Memory Cards The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D40x. 128MB. 4GB *† Panasonic 64MB. check that device supports SDHC. deleted. Use Nikon filters. or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded. or subject to strong physical shocks. • The D40x can not be used with linear polarizing filters. set exposure compensation to +1. regardless of speed. 2GB *. Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment control (–1. +2. eyepiece accessories Eyepiece adapter required (available separately). • Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects. X0. A12. 128MB. other device. turn the camera off. • Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. 1GB. • Do not expose to heat. 256MB. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card. • Moiré may occur if a filter is used when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame. 102 Technical Notes/Optional Accessories .Other Accessories • Diopter adjustment viewfinder lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5. 4GB *† Toshiba 64MB. SanDisk 64MB. copying. 1GB. 0. ND4S. C-PL. • Do not apply force to the card casing. • DR-6 right-angle viewing attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece. drop. slip-in. 2GB *. or direct sunlight. +0. X1. and rear-interchange. or copied to a computer. • The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens. high levels of humidity. –4. 256MB. 512MB. • Eyepiece adapter: Attach the DG-2 magnifier to the D40x. 128MB. 512MB. 256MB. • Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in. check that device † SDHC compliant. Memory Cards • Format memory cards in the camera before first use. and +3m–1.

EP-5 AC adapter connecsources tor required (available separately). the battery-level indicator in the monitor will show . • ML-L3 wireless remote control: Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits or to prevent blur caused by camera shake. Insert the EH-5 AC adapter plug into the EH-5 AC inlet ( ) and connect the EH-5 DC plug to the EP-5 DC in connector ( ). Power • EH-5 AC adapter: Use to power the camera for extended periods. • EP-5 AC adapter connector: Connect the EH-5 to the D40x. Technical Notes/Optional Accessories 103 . the following accessories were available for the D40x. Up to date information is available at Nikon websites or from our latest product catalogs. viewfinder screen. Insert the EP-5 into the battery chamber as shown at right. Guide the power cord into the opening left by the power connector cover and close the battery-chamber cover. • BF-1A body cap: The BF-1A keeps the mirror. See the EP-5 and EH-5 instruction manuals for more information on using an AC adapter. • EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion battery: Additional EN-EL9 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. Remote 1 2 3 4 5 controls Software • Capture NX: A complete photo editing package with support for RAW images. Be sure to update to the latest version. When the camera is powered by the AC adapter. Note: Capture NX and Camera Control Pro automatically check for updates if an Internet connection is detected at startup. • Camera Control Pro: Control the camera from a computer and save photos to disk. Connecting the Optional EP-5 AC Adapter Connector and EH-5 AC Adapter 1 2 3 4 Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber ( ) and power-connector ( ) covers. The ML-L3 uses a 3V CR2505 battery. and low-pass filter free of Body caps dust when a lens is not in place. Video cables • EG-D100 video cable: View photos on TV or record them to video tape ( 62). making sure the “+” and “–” terminals are in the correct orientation.Accessories for the D40x At the time of writing.

Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period. Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. such as lenses or optional Speedlights. Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty. dry cloth. apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft viewfinder cloth and clean with care. mirror. wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. dry area with the terminal cover in place. blower. store the camera in a dry. These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a Lens. wipe Monitor the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. and To remove fingerprints and other stains. Camera body The Monitor Should the monitor break. and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). turn the camera off. then wipe gently with a soft. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years. Remove dust and lint with a blower. Servicing the Camera and Accessories The D40x is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that: • are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60% • are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields. After using the camera at the beach or seaside. When removing fingerprints and other stains. well-ventilated area. care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor from entering your eyes or mouth. near a space heater or in a closed vehicle in a hot day) or below –10°C (14 °F) Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint. and store the battery in a cool. 104 Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera . Do not apply pressure. should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced. remove the battery. If using an aerosol blower. To prevent mold or mildew. as this could result in damage or malfunction. such as televisions or radios • are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122 °F (for example. Any accessories regularly used with the camera.

Highlight On and press OK. Note. Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower.The Low-Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. Do not remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised. you can clean the filter as described below. The mirror will be lowered and the shutter curtain will close. revealing the low-pass filter. however. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. To prevent damage to the curtain. proceed to Step 7. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remove the lens and turn the camera on. as the bristles could damage the filter. To prevent the camera from powering off while the mirror is raised. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs. Select Mirror lock-up from the setup menu (note that this option is not available at battery levels of or below). observe the following precautions: • Do not turn the camera off until cleaning or inspection is complete. Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera 105 . Press the shutter-release button all the way down. If no foreign objects are present. Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter. To restore normal operation without inspecting the low-pass filter. The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open. Turn the camera off. a beep will sound and the AF-assist illuminator will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel. the curtain will close automatically. that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. turn the camera off. End cleaning or inspection immediately. • If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised. Do not use a blower-brush. use a full-charged battery or an optional EH-5 AC adapter and EP-5 AC adapter connector ( 103). examine the filter for dust or lint. Replace the lens or body cap. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter. The message shown at right will be displayed. If the camera turns off with the mirror raised.

or connector covers. from a blower. or tear Images recorded with the product are unaffected. however. Strong static an extended period. store the camera case in a plastic bag. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the building on a cold day. After using the camera at the beach or seaside. dry place. ing the low-pass filter. These actions could scratch. Stains can be removed by wiping Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean. When taking photographs on important occasions. damage or malfunction. place the device in a car. keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of perature. After removing the battery from the camera. well-ventilated area. or subject it to powerful air currents TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. such as occur when entering or leaving a heated liquid. gently remove dust and lint. To prevent condensation.wipe the lens carefully. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause The lens and mirror are easily damaged. or deleted. Depending on your location. 106 Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera . power. as damage data stored on the memory card. Intense light may cause the image sensor at least once a month. dry cloth. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower. avoid carrying the product from one location to dry cloth before use. card-slot. store the camera in a device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong dry. humidity. be sure to replace the terminal cover. rying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden See “The Low-Pass Filter” ( 105) for information on cleanchanges in temperature. care should be taken to avoid injury from broken source: Do not unplug the product or remove the battery glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touchwhile the product is on or while images are being recorded ing the skin or entering the eyes and mouth. then wipe gently with a soft. Note that desicproduct’s internal circuitry. These parts Do not apply pressure to the monitor. ready a spare EN-EL9 battery and keep it fully charged. the curtain. graphs. it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor. and may malfuncwipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in tion if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. tery-chamber. When using an Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in tem. Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this Storage: To prevent mold or mildew. Turn the camera on and release the to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photo. poke it that are always lit or that do not light.aerosol blower.Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body. If the product will not be used for electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. cant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens should be replaced at regular intervals. another while the AC adapter is connected.light. should be gently removed with a blower. Dust and lint irreparable damage. Replace the terminal Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is cover before putting the battery away. Do not. or affect the this may cause the material to deteriorate. This is common to all with cleaning tools. deform. can cause condensation inside the lens. extremely thin and easily damaged. Should the monTurn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power itor break. as this could cause are especially susceptible to damage. apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and device. pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an To prevent mold or mildew. Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright Handle all moving parts with care: Do not apply force to the bat. take the camera out of storage extended period. use a blower to strong shocks or vibration. To prevent an accidental interruption of era from functioning and should be removed with a soft. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camor internal circuitry. lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.shutter a few times before putting it away. Charge the battery before use. Store the battery in a cool. remove the battery to prevent leakage charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Keep dry: This product is not waterproof. Under no circumNotes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels stances should you exert pressure on the curtain.

• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat. Once warmed. being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap. a cold battery may recover some of its charge. however. clean the filter or have it cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel ( x). is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses.On cold days. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries: • Turn the product off before replacing the battery. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX (available separately. Once inside the camera. and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged. this foreign matter may adhere to the low-pass filter. be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera. Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations. • The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Technical Notes/Caring for the Camera 107 . Used batteries are a valuable resource. 103) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging applications. where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera when no lens is in place. The D40x. Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance. Observe due caution when handling the battery. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary. • Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter. Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather.

Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page numbers in the right-most column for more information.
Solution Delete files or folders. 20, 65 Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter adjustViewfinder is out of focus. 14, 102 ment lenses. Displays turn off without warning. Choose a longer auto off delay. 78 See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras,” Camera stops functioning. — below. Display in viewfinder is unrespon- The response times and brightness of the viewfinder — sive and dim. display varies with temperature. 80 Menu item is not displayed. Select Full for CSM/Setup menu. Rotate mode dial to another setting or insert memory 4, 12 Menu item can not be selected. card. Image size can not be changed. Image quality set to RAW or RAW+B. 30 Metering can not be changed. Autoexposure lock in effect. 46 Can not measure white balance. Subject is too dark or too bright. 71 Image can not be selected as source Image was not created with D40x. 72 for preset white balance. Full range of shutter speeds not Flash in use. 117 available. • Closest subject selected for AF-area mode: choose 24 another mode. Can not select focus area. • Press shutter-release button halfway to activate 14 exposure meters. Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus in AF-C autofocus Focus does not lock when shuttermode or when photographing moving subjects in 23, 26 release button is pressed halfway. AF-A mode. Problem Camera takes time to turn on.

A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances, a strong external static charge may cause the camera may stop functioning. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery (note that the battery may be hot) or disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter, and turn the camera on again. If the problem persists, turn the camera off and press the reset switch (see right; note that this resets the clock). In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.

Reset switch Connector cover

108 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting

Problem

Image in viewfinder is not in focus.

AF-assist illuminator does not light.

Solution • Manual focus selected: if AF-S or AF-I lens is attached, choose autofocus mode. Otherwise focus manually. • Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock. • Lens is not AF-S or AF-I: use manual focus. • Mode dial rotated to or : select another mode. • AF-assist lamp does not light for manual focus or continuous-servo autofocus. Choose AF-S. • Center focus area is not selected: select center focus area • Choose On for Custom Setting 9 (AF-assist). • Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use; wait for lamp to cool down. • Memory card is full, locked, or not inserted. • • • • •

28, 97 26, 28 28, 97 4, 18–19 23 25 76 —

Shutter release is disabled.

• • No photo taken when remote con- • trol shutter-release button is • pressed. • Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode. Camera is slow to record photos. Date of recording is not correct. Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder. Randomly-spaced bright pixels (“noise”) appears in photographs. Reddish areas appear in photos.

12, 13, 15 17 Flash is charging. 23 Camera is not in focus. CPU lens with aperture ring attached without lock- 8, 39 ing aperture at highest f/-number. Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial 39, 43, 45 to M. Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of bulb 41, 43 selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed. Replace battery in remote control. 103 Choose remote control mode. 33 Flash is charging. 17 Time selected for Custom Setting 17 (Remote on 79 duration) has passed: reselect remote control mode. Bright light is interfering with remote. —

Continuous shooting is not available when built-in 32, 34, flash is required. 36 Turn noise reduction off. 73 Set camera clock. 11 Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is — approximately 95%. • Lower ISO sensitivity or use noise reduction. 37, 73 • Shutter speed is slower than 8s: use noise reduction. 73 Reddish areas may appear in long time-exposures. Turn noise reduction on when shooting at shutter 44, 73 speeds of “bulb” or “--”.

Technical Notes/Troubleshooting 109

Problem Colors are unnatural Flashing areas appear in images. Shooting data appear on images. A graph appears during playback. RAW image is not played back. • Some photos are not displayed during playback. • Message displayed stating that no images are available for playback.

Solution • Select mode P, S, A, or M and adjust white balance to 39, 49 match light source. • Select mode P, S, A, or M and adjust Optimize image 39, 68 settings. Press multi selector up or down to choose photo information displayed. Photo was taken at image quality of NEF+JPEG. Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current will automatically be selected when next photo is taken. 51 30 66

66 • Select On for Rotate tall. 88 • Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation. “Tall” (portrait) orientation photos 88 • Camera orientation was changed while shutterare displayed in “wide” (landscape) release button was pressed in continuous shooting orientation. mode. 88 • Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken. • Some retouch options can not be applied to copies. 89 Can not retouch photo. • Photo created or modified with other device. 90 Can not delete photo. Photo is protected: remove protection. 54 Can not change print order. Memory card is full or locked. 13, 15 Photo is in RAW (NEF) format. Transfer to computer Can not select photo for printing. 55, 57 and print using PictureProject or Capture NX. Can not print pictures via direct USB Set USB to MTP/PTP. 58, 84 connection. Photo is not displayed on TV. Choose correct video mode. 62, 83 Can not copy photos to computer. Choose correct USB option. 55 Can not use Capture NX. Update software to latest version. 31, 103 • Set USB to MTP/PTP. 55, 56 Can not use Camera Control Pro. • Update software to latest version. 103

110 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting

(blinks) number). 20. 39–44 • Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter. Format the card. Turn camera off and recharge battery or replace Recharge battery. Memory card is locked. (blinks) • Attached lens is not CPU lens: select mode M. Shutter release disabled. This card is not formatted. (blinks) then turn camera on again. 12 • Choose lower ISO sensitivity. • Reduce image quality or size.x authorized service representative. • Use flash. 8. Choose battery designated Insert EN-EL9 battery. This memory card cannot be used. Insert memory card. 65. Complete End cleaning or inspection of low-pass filter and operation and turn camera — turn camera off immediately. No SD card inserted. 81 (blinks) (blinks) Subject is too bright. (blinks) with fully-charged spare battery. 45 — 7. • No lens attached: attach lens. (blinks) Initialization error. 29–30 • Delete photographs and/or reset sequential file 20. 43. 39–44 • Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number). Turn Turn camera off. Card is full. / Lens not attached. (blinks) Slide card write-protect switch to “write” position. (blinks) for use in this camera. Contact retailer or Nikon. 102 • Card may be damaged. and camera off and then on again. Message Viewfinder Solution Lock lens aperture ring at minimum aperture (largest f/Lock ring at minimum aperture (largest f/-number). Subject is too dark. (blinks) Set camera clock.Camera Error Messages and Displays This section lists common warning indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and monitor. 12–13. Clock not set. Slide lock to “write” position. remove and reinsert battery. 86 • Insert new memory card. 13. 15 105 11 12–13 13 (blinks) • Use Nikon-approved card. Insert another card. 65 Format memory card. 39 8 39. 9– 10 9–10. 37 39–44 • Increase shutter speed. Battery level is low. numbering. • Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number). / Attach a lens. off immediately. 34 • Decrease shutter speed. This battery cannot be used. 102 37 • Choose higher ISO sensitivity. 39–44 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting 111 . • Delete unwanted files or insert new memory card. Card may be damaged.

Message — Viewfinder (blinks) Solution 20. If error occurs with ink remaining in printer. Delete file or reformat memory card. posed. 66 13. (blinks) (blinks) (blinks) (blinks) — — — Change shutter speed or select mode M. 78 • Built-in flash is lowered: raise built-in flash 34 • Reduce distance to subject. 12 • Set Playback folder to All. 65 Insert new ink or toner cartridge in printer. Contact Nikon-authorized service representative. FOLDER CONTAINS NO IMAGES. use larger aperture. Flash has fired at full power. Error. Press shutter release button again. View photo. • Insert another memory card. Please try again. check printer 60 status. Unable to measure preset white balance. Choose another setting or use a CPU lens. if underex48. If error persists. • SB-400 is unable to fully illuminate subject at cur. 100 — / (blinks) Flash is in TTL mode. consult with Nikon-authorized service representa16–17 tive. Press shutter-release button again. adjust settings and try again. x (blinks) Help A blinking is displayed in the monitor or viewfinder indicates that a description of the current problem can be viewed by pressing the button. 76. or 37. No Bulb in S mode.99 rent lens focal length. increase ISO sensitivity or flash range. 45. 47. x. 70 Adjust exposure settings and try again. Change flash control mode for optional Speedlight. CHECK PRINTER. 50. 20. Initialization error. Increase distance to subject (this warning is not displayed with other optional Speedlights). 39–44 (blinks) Camera unable to measure preset white balance. FILE DOES NOT CONTAIN IMAGE DATA. 112 Technical Notes/Troubleshooting . 39–44 • Flash head on optional SB-400 Speedlight is in 99 bounce-flash position. Contact Nikon-authorized service representative.

...................................................................................................................... • The Command Dial.................................................................................... P Optimize image Image quality 1 Image size 1 White balance 1 ISO sensitivity 1 Noise reduction 1: Beep 2: Focus mode 1 3 3: AF-area mode 1 4: Shooting mode 1 5: Metering 1 6: No memory card? 7: Image review 8: Flash compensation 1 9: AF-assist 10: ISO auto 11: /Fn button 12: AE-L/AF-L 13: AE lock 14: Built-in flash 15: Auto off timers 16: Self-timer 17: Remote on duration 3 Flash mode 1 5 Autoexposure lock 1 Exposure compensation 1 Flexible program 1.............. 5............. • Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash..... • Supported Standards ....................................... Technical Notes/Appendix 113 ... • Aperture................ Available Settings and Defaults The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode......... Available with optional Speedlight only................................................Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics: • Available Settings and Defaults ................ • Exposure Program (Mode P)............ • Flash Control.... 2...................... Sensitivity................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. shutter speed and aperture are not affected............................................... Reset with two-button reset ( 38)............. Autoexposure lock not recommended in these modes................................................................................................................................................ 3 1......... Shooting menu Other settings Custom Settings 2 S A M 113 115 116 116 117 117 117 117 118 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 3 5 6 4.... • Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size ................................................................................. and Flash Range............................................................................................... 6......................... 3..................... Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting........................... • White Balance and Color Temperature................ Reset with Custom Setting R (Reset)...................... Affects electronic analog exposure display only.................................

Max. sequence Auto image rotation Focus area Focus lock Flexible program AE lock hold Exposure compensation Flash mode * Auto slow sync.0 On Off 1 TTL Auto . Playback Shooting menu Setup menu Other settings Current 2s On — JPEG normal Large Auto 100 Off Simple Graphic Off 2007. sensitivity set to 800. 1. S A M Closest subject Defaults for other settings are listed below.00:00:00 (format and time zone vary with region of sale) 0 Varies with region of sale Varies with region of sale — Mass storage ND40X Off On — Center — Off — Off — Off — 0.0 Fill flash — Auto — Auto — Auto Slow * AUTO Normal S A M 114 Technical Notes/Appendix Custom Settings 0. P Playback folder Slide show: Frame intvl Rotate tall Optimize image Image quality Image size White balance ISO sensitivity Noise reduction CSM/Setup menu Info display format Auto shooting info World time LCD brightness Video mode Language Image comment USB Folders File no.01.01.The following defaults are restored with Custom Setting R (Reset): P 1: Beep On 2: Focus mode AF-A 3: AF-area mode Closest subject Dynamic Single 4: Shooting mode Single frame 5: Metering Matrix 6: No memory card? Release locked 7: Image review On 8: Flash compensation — 9: AF-assist On — On — 10: ISO auto — 11: /Fn button Self-timer 12: AE-L/AF-L AE/AF lock 13: AE lock Off 14: Built-in flash — 15: Auto off timers Normal 16: Self-timer 10s 17: Remote on duration 1min. Min. shutter speed set to 1/30s.

41. . 34–36). Set aperture (mode M. A. P. Exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed (flexible program. Fn button (available when the following options are selected for Custom Setting 11. A. and 42). Shooting mode 77) Image quality/size + ISO sensitivity White balance Technical Notes/Appendix 115 . S. . and A 47). 43). 48). + Set exposure compensation (modes P. S. Changes to the affected setting are visible in the viewfinder and shooting information display.The Command Dial The command dial can be used in alone or in combination with other controls to adjust the following settings. . and M modes. Flash settings + Choose a flash mode ( M modes. Choose a shutter speed (modes S and M. Set aperture (mode A. mode P. 43). . 40). . + Set flash compensation (P. S.

2 — 9.3 431 100 S 0.3 1500 100 RAW+BASIC —/L 10.1 3 70 6 1. If enough memory remains for over 999 photographs.5K” is shown if enough memory remains for 1.7 225 100 S 1.2 487 100 BASIC M 0. Image quality RAW Exposure Program (Mode P) The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph.Maximum number of frames that can be taken before shooting stops.7 839 100 S 0.500 exposures. Actual number of frames may vary with make of memory card. 2.2 487 100 L 2. “1. When matrix metering is used. Additional photographs can be taken as soon as enough memory is available in memory buffer. for example.Total file size of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.All figures are approximate and assume average file size. values over 16 1/3 EV are reduced to 16 1/3 EV. 3. Image size File size (MB) 1 Number of images 1 Burst capacity 1.0 79 6 L 4. F (lens focal length)≤55mm 135mm≥F>55mm F>135mm Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity.6 888 100 L 1. the camera will display the number of exposures remaining in thousands (“K”). 116 Technical Notes/Appendix Aperture .8 129 100 FINE M 2. actual file size and memory card capacity may vary with scene recorded and make of memory card. the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent.4 251 100 NORMAL M 1.Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 1GB Panasonic Pro HIGH SPEED memory card at different image quality and size settings.

0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.7 ft. or when using an SC-series 17.–24ft. Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional Speedlight. Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash The following shutter speeds are available when the built-in flash is used. Supported Standards • DCF Version 2. 3in.8 4 5. . 2ft. 2ft. .5 0.6–0.–4ft.4 0. Mode . the brightness of the background is not taken into account. • DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. 2ft. and Flash Range Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.6 8 11 8 11 16 11 16 22 16 22 32 22 32 — Range 1600 5. 10in.6–1.–2ft.–6ft. P.0–7.–12ft. 100 1.8 4 2. or SB-600 Speedlights.6–1. 3ft. Recommended for use with exposure compensation. 2ft. 7in. Technical Notes/Appendix 117 . A Shutter speed 1/200–1/60 s 1/200–1/125 s 1/200–1s Mode S M Shutter speed 1/200–30s 1/200–30s. 2ft.–2ft. 7in.6–2.6 4 5. 6in. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.8 4 5. 28. SB-800.Flash Control ( 99–101) The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination with the built-in flash or optional SB-400.8 0.6 8 5. Aperture.6–3. • Exif version 2. 11in. • Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject. 3in. 2ft. or 29 sync cable.21: The D40x supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2. 4in.4 2 2.7 0.6 8 11 16 22 32 — — m 1. • PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries. 9in. 4in.–8ft.6–0.9 0.7–5.6 8 11 16 Aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 2 2. a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers. allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer. Sensitivity.4 0. • i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance between the main subject and the background. 2ft.21.9 0.–17ft. for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details.

400K 6.200K 3.200K 7.600K 5.600K 5.200K 6.900K 4.300K 5.000K 2. sunlight 5.400K Shade 8.200K 5.700K 3.White Balance and Color Temperature Approximate color temperatures for each white balance setting are given below (values may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters): Fine tuning White balance None –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3 Auto 3.200K 5.100K 2.800K 2.400K 7.700K White balance preset — Not available * Color temperature range reflects wide variation among fluorescent light sources.400K 5.800K 5.000K 6.600K 5.000K 3.500K–8.800K Cloudy 6.100K 6.000K 3.000K 4.700K Fluorescent * 4.700K Dir.600K 6. ranging from lowtemperature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.200K 8.800K 5.500K 5.000K 9. 118 Technical Notes/Appendix .000K 5.000K 4.200K 5.900K 2.300K 3.000K Fine tuning added to value selected by camera Incandescent 3.800K Flash 5.500K 7.400K 6.800K 8.

total pixels: 10. Fixed eye-level penta-Dach mirror type –1. 10in.8× (50-mm lens at infinity.Specifications Type Effective pixels CCD Image size (pixels) Lens mount Compatible lenses * Type G or D AF Nikkor AF-S.896×1.75 million • 3.8D Other AF Nikkor †/AI-P Nikkor Single-lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses 10.296 (Small) All functions supported All functions supported except autofocus Can only be used in mode M. dynamic-area AF.872×2.0m/1ft.944 (Medium) Nikon F mount with AF contacts • 1.592 (Large) • 2. but exposure meter does not function.2 million 23.6 or faster.6 or faster. * IX Nikkor lenses can not be used †Excluding lenses for F3AF Picture angle Viewfinder Diopter Eyepoint Focusing screen Frame coverage Magnification Reflex mirror Lens aperture Self-timer Focus-area selection Lens servo Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1. electronic range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5. electronic range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.) –1.5–3.5m-1 18mm (–1. predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status • Manual focus (M) SD (Secure Digital) memory cards.0–+19EV (ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F) Single-area AF.0m-1) Quick return Electronically controlled with instant return Electronically controlled timer with 2.936×1.7–+0. continuous-servo AF (AF-C).–9ft.0 and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) • NEF (RAW): compressed 12-bit • JPEG: JPEG baseline-complaint TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM 530 autofocus sensor module with AF-assist illuminator (range approximately 0. 8in.0m-1) Type B BriteView clear matte screen Mark V with superimposed focus brackets Approximately 95% of lens (vertical and horizontal) Approximately 0. dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority Focus can be locked by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button 100–1600 in steps of 1EV with additional setting one step over 1600 Storage Media File system Compression Autofocus Detection range AF-area mode Focus lock ISO sensitivity (Recommended Exposure Index) Technical Notes/Specifications 119 .6×15. 10 or 20s duration Focus area can be selected from 3 focus areas • Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S). AF-I Other Type G or D Nikkor PC Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8mm. Non-CPU Can be used with manual focus in mode M. camera supports SDHC Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2. 5.5 times lens focal length. –1. auto AFS/AF-C selection (AF-A). all other functions supported except autofocus All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color matrix metering II.

. SB-800. and 22s Available with SB-800 • . slow sync. 28. portrait. and ground contacts and safety lock Supported with built-in flash. close-up. SB-400. and SB-600 Available with SB-800 and CPU lens Available with such Speedlights as SB-800. low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with brightness adjustment Can be selected from NTSC and PAL Hi-Speed USB ¼in. aperture-priority auto (A). 20°C/68°F) Exposure meter coupling Digital Vari-Program/ exposure modes Exposure compensation Exposure lock Shutter Speed White balance Built-in flash Guide number (m/ft) Flash Sync contact Flash control TTL Three-mode through-the-lens (TTL) exposure metering system 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses). red-eye reduction.000 s in steps of 1/3 EV. red-eye reduction. flash synchronization at shutter speeds of up to 1/200 s TTL flash control by 420-pixel RGB sensor. night portrait). fill-flash and red-eye reduction available with optional Speedlight • : Auto slow sync with red-eye reduction. SB-800.5-mm circle (about 2. 2. . auto slow sync. six manual modes with fine tuning and preset white balance • . M: Fill flash. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR and standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR available when CPU lens is used with built-in flash. 27. slow sync with red-eye reduction. : Auto.5in. programmed auto (P) with flexible program. and SB-600. rear-curtain sync –3–+1EV in increments of 1/3 EV Lights when built-in flash or SB-series Speedlight such as 400. (ISO 1222) Firmware can be upgraded by user Auto aperture Non-TTL auto Range-priority manual Flash mode Flash compensation Flash-ready indicator Accessory shoe Nikon Creative Lighting System Monitor Video output External interface Tripod socket Firmware upgrades 120 Technical Notes/Specifications . f/1. 230. slow sync with red-eye reduction and slow sync available with optional Speedlight • . or 600 is fully charged. . Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-800 or SU-800 as Commander. signal. auto/no flash.Exposure Metering Matrix Center-weighted Spot Range (ISO 100 equivalent. : Fill-flash and red-eye reduction available with optional Speedlight • P. shutter-priority auto (S). rear-curtain with slow sync • S. child. : Auto flash with auto pop-up • P. M: Manual pop-up with button release • Approximately 12/39 at ISO 100 and 20°C/68°F (manual 13/42) X-contact only. S.4 lens. manual (M) –5–+5EV in increments of 1/3 EV Exposure locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button Electronically controlled vertical-travel focal plane shutter 30–¼. SB-400.. A. auto with red-eye reduction. sports. metering performed by 420-pixel RGB sensor Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center of frame Meters 3. 80DX. 28DX. A: Fill flash. landscape. color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses). bulb Auto (TTL white balance with 420-pixel RGB sensor). .5% of frame) centered on active focus area 0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering) 2–20EV (spot metering) CPU coupling Digital Vari-Program ( auto. . 800. blinks for about 3s after flash is fired at full output Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with sync.000-dot.

Korean. Polish.2×0. The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged EN-EL9 battery (1000mAh) is approximately 520 shots in single-frame shooting mode and 2. the shutter release pressed halfway for three seconds and focus then cycled from infinity to minimum range three times.4×2.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens. The following can reduce battery life: • Using the monitor • Taking RAW (NEF) photographs • Keeping the shutter-release button pressed half. • Use batteries immediately after charging. Finnish. Battery life for continuous shooting mode is measured with image quality set to JPEG Basic.0×2. memory card. Dutch. Russian. after six shots. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.) 51g (1. English. Portuguese. 1oz.7in. all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F). Technical Notes/Specifications 121 . All measurements are performed with an 18–55mm f/3. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.6in. the cycle is repeated once exposure meters have turned off.• Slow shutter speeds way • Using vibration reduction with VR lenses • Repeated autofocus operations To ensure maximum battery performance: • Keep the battery contacts clean.8oz. a shutter speed of ½50 s.5×3. Spanish. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain. excluding power cable Battery Life Battery life varies with charge state and shooting conditions.) without battery. the monitor is turned on for five seconds and then turned off. Japanese. German. flash fired with every other shot).) 495g (1lb. requires optional EP-5 AC adapter connector) Approximately 126×64×94mm (5. EN-EL9 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery Type Rated capacity Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximate weight Rechargeable lithium-ion battery 7.4V/1000mAh Approximately 36×56×14mm (1. Battery life for single frame shooting mode is measured according to CIPA standards (lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and shutter released at default settings once every 30s. Swedish • One rechargeable Nikon EN-EL9 Li-ion battery. or body cap 0–+40°C (+32–104°F) Less than 85% (no condensation) Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximate weight Operating environment Temperature Humidity Unless otherwise stated. charging voltage (MH-23 quick charger): 7. an image size of M.Supported languages Power source Chinese (Simplified and Traditional).000 shots in continuous shooting mode. Specifications Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.5–5. The battery level displayed by the camera may vary with changes in temperature. Italian. French.).4V DC • EH-5 AC adapter (available separately.

28m (11in.0in. focus distance Aperture Aperture range Metering Filter diameter Dimensions (W×D×H) Approximate weight Lens hood G-type AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens with built-in CPU and Nikon mount Nikon DX-format digital cameras 18–55mm 1:3.4V/0.) Approximately 1.8m (5ft.5-5. 50/60Hz DC 8.5–22 (18mm zoom).8oz.2oz.) 80g (2. 55 Supplied to camera body Zoom adjusted by rotating lens ring Autofocus with low-noise motor.6×1.2×2.6–38 (55mm zoom) Maximum aperture 52mm (P=0.5–5.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor lens is used with the D40x is f/36. 45. 122 Technical Notes/Specifications . 35.75mm) Approximately 70.6GII ED AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor Lens (Available Separately) Type Supported cameras Focal length Max.5mm diameter×74mm/2. manual focus 0.8×3.) HB-33 (available separately. 11in.).MH-23 Quick Charger Rated input Rated output Supported batteries Charging time Operating temperature Dimensions (W×D×H) Length of cord Approximate weight AC 100–240V.9A EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion batteries Approximately 90 minutes 0–+40°C (+32–104°F) Approximately 82.1in. 24.) at all zoom positions Seven blade diaphragm with auto aperture f/3. f/5. attaches as shown below) The minimum aperture available when a 18-55 mm f/3.5–5. reproduction ratio Construction Angle Zoom positions Distance information Zoom Focus Min. from standard bayonet mount surface to front of lens 205g (7. excluding power cable 18–55 mm f/3.5×65×28mm (3.6 7 elements in 5 groups (including 1 ED glass element and 1 aspherical element) 76°–28° 50´ 18.

70. 83. 20. 77 AF-A. 24. See Focus. Shutter speed. Manual mode compensation. 9–10 life. See Focus. 83. 14. Programmed auto. 121 storage. 29–31. Monitor. 23. 43 meters. Autoexposure lock. See Programmed auto (function) button. 14 (auto mode). 53 (portrait mode). 17. 18 (protect) button. 20. 34 ? (help) button. AF-area mode E Electronic range finder. 31. 50. Flash. See also Clock. Tone compensation Copies. 8. 52. See Creative Lighting System Color. 23. 20. 3. 28. 5. 99–101 range. 6. 7 (AE-L/AF-L) button. 3. See also White balance Computer. 42. See Color mode. 103. 88 Auto meter off. 39. 4. 86 Filter. 83. 118. mode AF-S. 4. See also Reset.115 (exposure compensation). See Shooting mode. 50 (playback zoom) button. 85 Index 123 . 59. 9–10. 2. 39–40. Saturation. 117 Digital Vari-Program. 86 FINE. 113– 114. 33 (self timer indicator). AF-S/AF-I Aperture. 68–69. formatting. 74–79 D Date. 18–19 Diopter. 78 Auto shooting info (setup menu). 111–112 (flash mode) button. 18 (night portrait mode). 66. 92 Blur. 17. 43. 115 Focus. 60–61. Shutterpriority auto. 48 level. 9–10. See Focus Auto image rotation (setup menu). AF-area mode CLS. 6. See Color mode Advanced Wireless Lighting. 77. 26–27 manual. 90 DPOF See Digital Print Order Format Dust off ref photo (setup menu). 39. 5. 11. 19 Closest subject priority. 2. 4. See Color mode Color space. 54 (remote control indicator). 47 (exposure compensation) button. 5. See Color mode Color temperature. 41. continuous C Camera Control Pro. 83 B BASIC. 2. 77. 17. 77. 31. 14. 4. 54 Delete (playback menu). See Image quality Flash built in. 77 AE lock (Custom Settings menu). 103. 76 AF-C. 25 center. sequence (setup menu). 32 (delete) button. 24. 85 Folders (setup menu). 65 single-frame playback. 83 Close up. 54. 80–81 Custom Settings. See also AE lock Autofocus. See also Aperture.101 minimum. See Focus. See Metering. See also Self timer. 2. See Focus. 46. 103 Capture NX. 69 Color profile. 48 (flash compensation) button. 68. 117 Exposure. 55–56 Continuous. 48 (flash-ready indicator). 106–107 Beep (Custom Settings menu). reducing. cropping pictures for. See Long time-exposures Burst.. 3. mode Contrast. See also World time DCF. 54 /Fn button (Custom Settings menu). 111–112 (landscape mode). See also Clock. See also Battery. 43 (auto/flash off mode). 106– 107. 65 selected images. 42 Autoexposure lock. 19 (close-up mode). 7. See Focus. Two-button reset Delete. 25 autofocus. White balance Color mode. Filter effects. 117 maximum. Lens. battery EN-EL9. LCD brightness. manual Exif version 2. 76 AF-assist illuminator. 32. 4. See Design Rule for Camera File System Default settings. 117 ready indicator. 85 playback. Shooting mode. 33 (sports mode). 23–28 AF-area mode. 4. Aperture-priority auto. 32. Filter effects Neutral Density (ND). 3. See also Viewfinder D-lighting. 74 Black and white. 19 (thumbnail) button. 4. delayed remote. 4. 15. White balance (aperture) button. 103 Center-weighted. See Shooting mode. 7. 111 Filter effects (retouch menu). 33 (self-timer) button. 119 Folder. 75 AF-assist (Custom Settings menu). 2. 33 F File. mode AF-area mode. 76 mode. 32. 45–48. 15–17 Auto off timers (Custom Settings menu). 96–103 supplied. 24. 19. optional. 56. See Image quality Battery. 99–101 Crop. 3. 121 inserting. See Firmware version Firmware version (setup menu). quickresponse remote Brightness. 121. See also Accessories. 117 Digital Print Order Format. 3. See Focus. 116 Eyepiece cap. 23–27 lock. AFarea mode AF-area mode (Custom Settings menu). Hue. 87 Dynamic area AF. 102. 19 (playback) button. 2. 116 format. See also Printing. 50. 3. 86. See Lens. 91. See Focus. 34–36 optional. 6. 43 Aperture-priority auto. 87. 53 A A. 51. 111 battery. Protecting photographs all images. 4. 65 Depth of field. 57. continuous Continuous-servo AF. 111– 112 remote. 92 Firmware. autofocus. 19 (continuous shooting indicator). See also Optimize image. 42. 6. 117 File no. 2. level. 2. See Aperture-priority auto Accessories. See Metering 420-pixel RGB sensor. 52. optional optional. 4. 90 D-lighting (retouch menu). 42 Design Rule for Camera File System. 99 Flexible program.21. 28 mode. 47 electronic analog exposure display. 3 ? (help indicator). See Metering Clock. 5. 47 (flash compensation). 44. 46. 39–44. 66 recording. World time Daylight saving time. 100 AE-L/AF-L (Custom Settings menu). 74. 77 Adobe RGB. 7. 75 area. brightness of Built-in flash (Custom Settings menu). 51. Flash. 78 Bulb. Trim CSM/Setup menu (setup menu). 20. See Exposure. 38. 39–44. 75 tracking. Shooting mode. 65. See Small picture Creative Lighting System (CLS). 34–36. 11. 18 (child mode). mode AF-S/AF-I. 78 program. See also Memory card. 78 compensation.Index Symbols 3D color matrix metering II. See Focus.

See also ISO auto (Custom Settings Black and white menu). menu). 75 Non-CPU lens. See Lens. 92. autofomenu). See Flash. 11. 106 Mirror lock-up (setup menu).M M. 70 using. 63–64 NEF (RAW). Neutral Density (ND) Night photography. 52 storage Histogram. 105 dimensions of. 94–95 Setup menu Image quality. See Accessories. See Number of exposures remaining L L. 67 speed. 105 cleaning. 89–95 Thumbnail. Size. 84 (menu) button. 4. 70 priority auto (shooting information) but. 86. 44 Low-pass filter. 66. 22. 39. 73. 1. 69 Two-button reset. See Flash. 66 Shooting menu. 92 Matrix. MTP/PTP J JPEG. 81 Image comment (setup lock. 57–61. See (night portrait mode) Noise. See Flash mode mode Small picture (retouch Remote. auto. (night portrait continuous. 60–61. See Image size mode Slide show. 81–82 Monochrome. 88 Tone compensation. 117 card PictureProject. Slow sync. 32 Print set (DPOF) (playback Shutter. See ISO sensitivity (shooting (sports mode). 39. Shutter30. 30–31 Metering. 68–69 Options. See also Pict33 Bridge. Shooting mode. See (landscape mode) Language. See (portrait Shooting mode. 79 (flexible program indicator). 41 menu). See also Programmed auto. 40 trol. Speedlight. See Image size Landscapes. 37. Auto mode. 50–54 Sensitivity. 86. See Memory card P. 103 tom Settings menu). Programmed Image size (shooting menu). See Focus. See Metering mode. mode i-TTL flash control. See Manual mode H Manual mode. See AF-assist illucapacity. NEF Single-servo autofocus. Mass Highlights. See Programmed auto Secure Digital. 20. See Image size S. 116 minator formatting. 37. See Shutter-priority auto (single-frame shooting indicator). 22 auto off. See Shooting R mode. Shooting Spot. See Color mode Remote control. See USB. See USB. thumbnail 66 Trim (retouch menu). Self timer Playback. 79 Time. 112 Mass storage. 104. 88. 97–98 Lighting. Digital tings menu). Self timer. 38 O Optimize image (shooting menu). 92 auto. 8. 6. 5. 3. See White balance. 69 zoom. See Image size M. 32. 59 single frame. 44. 13. 73 No memory card? (Custom Settings menu). 73. 80–88 thumbnail. 76 Monochrome (retouch ISO sensitivity. 73 cus. 102 Illuminator. 29–31. White balance Long time-exposures. I 116 (setting) button. 75 Vari-Program. 81–83 menu). 37. 84 LCD brightness (setup menu). preset quick-response remote. 76. 116 Memory card. See Flash. 102. See also Aperture-priImage size. See also Clock. See Self-timer (Custom Settings USB. 86. 32–33. 30. 12–13. 105. 2. 3. Print set (DPOF) self timer. 103 T Remote on duration (CusTelevision. See Remote con5. 91 Rotating photographs. See Memory PictBridge. 52. 63–95. 74 exposures Retouch menu. See Reset World time Reset (Custom Settings Time exposure. See also CSM/ menu). See Image quality area mode Single frame. 103 self timer Picture Transfer Protocol. quick-response remote sRGB. 30. 43–44 Help. 81 S S. 116 K K. 17. 39. 99–101 MTP/PTP. Optimize image delayed remote. 70 Image review (Custom Setority auto. 32–33 PRE. 6. 39–44. 63–64 Image overlay (retouch Menus. 3. 62. 57–61. 32– Printing. 31. 121 Language (setup menu). See Metering Hue. 57. See Image quality. 22 approved. 119 Mode. 32 Saturation. See Long time menu). 97 non-CPU. See Flash delayed remote. See Filter. 81. See Monochrome menu. See Filter. Manual mode. mode Rear curtain sync. 105 menu). See also Noise reduction Noise reduction (shooting menu). Neutral Density (ND) NEF (RAW). 68–69 P SD. See ISO sensitivity full frame. 32–33. 104 ton. 52 Sharpening. 20. 83 Lens. 70 Image sensor. 84. 91 67 Red-eye reduction. MTP/PTP menu). See Image quality. 105 N ND. 14. 57. See (RAW) Focus. single frame RAW. 122 AF-S/AF-I.Monitor. 29–31. 6. AFQuality. autofocus. Focus. 29–31. 13 menu). 45–46. 32 mode). 32–33. 83. 78 Info display format (setup brightness of. 50 Sepia. 53 Shooting information display. 1. 37. Self-portraits. 68. See Accessories. 54 Shutter-priority auto. nonCPU NORMAL. 78. 75. 41 Q Single area AF. 65–67 Setup menu. 77 cropping pictures for. 86. See Playback. optional 124 Index . See Slide show Red eye correction (retouch Slide show (playback menu). menu). 97–98. Rotate tall (playback menu). 76 Moving subjects. 8. 55–56. Playback folder (playback 6. Reset. 3. 12–13. 50. NEF (RAW) Neutral Density. See Image quality Number of exposures remaining. 75 Image quality (shooting Mirror. 92–93 optional. 76 menu). 83 menu). See Shooting mode. 40 Exposure Protecting photographs. 77 mode). 15 Format memory card (setup menu). 69 Memory buffer. 68–73 Portraits.

5. 70–72. See also Color temperature preset. 62 Viewfinder. 49. 62 Video mode (setup menu). 102. 57–58 Mass storage. 49. 111–112 Viewing photographs. 5. 55. 62. 2. 57–58. 55–56. 84 V Video cable. 83 Index 125 . 55–56. 55. 49. 70–72 White balance. 103 Video device. 84 MTP/PTP. 111– 112 accessories. 55. 83 VIDEO OUT. 14. See Playback W (white balance indicator). 49. 14 indicators. 84 cable. 6. 11. 84 USB (setup menu). 70–72 White balance (shooting menu).U USB. 102 focus. 70–72 World time (setup menu). 16. 62.

126 .